EPL C8000 Service Manual
EPL C8000 Service Manual
®
4009762
Notice
o All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
o All effort have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would
greatly appreciate being informed of them.
o The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
o All effort have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would
greatly appreciate being informed of them.
o The above not withstanding SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION can assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual or the consequences
thereof.
General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners. EPSON disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
DANGER Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in serious or fatal personal injury. Great caution should be exercised in
performing procedures preceded by DANGER Headings.
The precautionary measures itemized below should always be observed when performing repair/maintenance procedures.
DANGER
1. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE PRODUCT FROM THE POWER SOURCE AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERFORMING ANY
MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR PROCEDURES.
2. NO WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON THE UNIT BY PERSONS UNFAMILIAR WITH BASIC SAFETY MEASURES AS DICTATED
FOR ALL ELECTRONICS TECHNICIANS IN THEIR LINE OF WORK.
3. WHEN PERFORMING TESTING AS DICTATED WITHIN THIS MANUAL, DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL
INSTRUCTED TO DO SO. WHEN THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED, USE EXTREME CAUTION IN WORKING ON
POWER SUPPLY AND OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.
WARNING
1. REPAIRS ON EPSON PRODUCT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY AN EPSON CERTIFIED REPAIR TECHNICIAN.
2. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE SOURCE VOLTAGES IS THE SAME AS THE RATED VOLTAGE, LISTED ON THE SERIAL NUMBER/
RATING PLATE. IF THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS A PRIMARY AC RATING DIFFERENT FROM AVAILABLE POWER SOURCE, DO NOT
CONNECT IT TO THE POWER SOURCE.
3. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR
REPLACING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND/OR INDIVIDUAL CHIPS.
4. IN ORDER TO PROTECT SENSITIVE MICROPROCESSORS AND CIRCUITRY, USE STATIC DISCHARGE EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS
ANTI-STATIC WRIST STRAPS, WHEN ACCESSING INTERNAL COMPONENTS.
5. REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING COMPONENTS ONLY WITH THOSE COMPONENTS BY THE MANUFACTURE; INTRODUCTION OF
SECOND-SOURCE ICs OR OTHER NONAPPROVED COMPONENTS MAY DAMAGE THE PRODUCT AND VOID ANY APPLICABLE
EPSON WARRANTY.
About this manual
This manual describes basic functions, theory of electrical and mechanical operations, maintenance and repair procedures of EPL-C8000. The
instructions and procedures included herein are intended for the experienced repair technicians, and attention should be given to the precautions on
the preceding page.
o Be careful not to injure yourself with the sharp edges of the parts.
o Do not work with wet or oily hands-you may drop a part or injure
yourself. Dry your hands first.
o When pulling out a part (including a harness), do not use too much
force. Pull out the part carefully and slowly step by step.
Consumables Improper Printer Use
Some parts may cause a particulate explosion or fire if handled Modifying, revising, tampering with the printer, especially to the safety
improperly. Do not handle these parts near fire or throw into a fire. mechanism, is strictly prohibited in all circumstances.
Some materials (e.g., Developer or Fuser Oil) may cause bodily injury.
Do not swallow or inhale these materials or allow them to come in
contact with the eyes.
Help to protect those around you and follow the prohibitions against
swallowing or inhaling those materials. Be careful to protect the eyes at
all times.
Place a sheet inside or under the printer so that the floor or workbench
is protected.
If the Developer or Fuser Oil gets on your clothing, dry it with a cloth and
wash with clean water.
1
PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS
EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B
Contents
FEATURES .................................................................................................... 1 PANEL SETTING......................................................................................... 32
SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................... 3 Setting Methods ...................................................................................... 32
Basic Specifications .................................................................................. 3 SelecType Setting Menu List .................................................................. 35
Paper Specification ................................................................................... 8 Details of Menus and Settings ................................................................ 39
Reliability and Durability .......................................................................... 11
Operating Environment (including options) ............................................. 13
Environmental Conditions for Storage and Transportation ..................... 14
Electrical Specification ............................................................................ 15
Process Specifications ............................................................................ 16
Applicable Standards .............................................................................. 16
Consumables and Options ...................................................................... 17
Toner cartridge ................................................................................... 17
DRUM CARTRIDGE ........................................................................... 18
Fuser Oil Roll ...................................................................................... 19
Waste Toner Box ................................................................................ 19
Regularly Replaced Parts........................................................................ 19
Exterior Dimensions ................................................................................ 20
Controller Specification ........................................................................... 21
Controller Board Jumper Settings ........................................................... 21
INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................. 22
Parallel Interface Specification ................................................................ 23
Option Interface....................................................................................... 25
CONTROL PANEL....................................................................................... 26
Appearance and Descriptions ................................................................. 26
LED Description ................................................................................. 27
Button Functions ..................................................................................... 28
SERVICE FUNCTIONS................................................................................ 30
Hex dump Mode ...................................................................................... 30
EEPROM Initialization ............................................................................. 30
Formatting the Flash ROM Module ......................................................... 30
Updating the Program ROM.................................................................... 30
ROM Module Copy.................................................................................. 30
Panel Setting Initialization ....................................................................... 31
Maintenance Mode.................................................................................. 31
Error Recovery Operation ....................................................................... 31
EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B
1. ESC/Page-Color
n Printer pages: High Speed priority. Color correction and color
adjustment can be set for each object. (But 1 resolution and
screen type [gradation=LPl] per page.)
n Driver page: Fast processing (on fast PC). Color correction and
color adjustment can be set for each object.
n Image: Full color (WYSIWYG).
2. Bidirectional EJL can retrieve printer status and monitor the printer
environment.
1.2.1 Basic Specifications Color Standard mode 4 PPM or more 2PPM or more
half speed mode 1.8 PPM or more 0.9PPM or more
o Method: Semi-conductive laser beam scanning and dry
electrophotographic process Notes:
*1. In this mode, the printer prints tow print images on the IBT belt and
o Resolution: 600 DPI the images are transferred in sequence onto two sheets of paper. It
o Print mode: is available for LT/A4 (LEF) or smaller.
n B/W mode: Standard monochrome print mode that supports *2. [LEF, or Long Edge Feed]
The longer edge of the paper is the top toward the paper feed direction.
the fastest speed.
[SEF, or Short Edge Feed]
n Color mode: Color mode which uses the color toner of Y, M, C, The shorter edge of the paper is the top toward the paper feed direction.
and BK. o First print*:
o Speed mode: - Face-up B/W: 20 seconds or less (LT/A4 LEF)
Color: 42.6 seconds or less (LT/A4 LEF)
n Standard mode: Transports paper at the highest speed - Face-down B/W: 24.9 seconds or less (LT/A4 LEF)
supported by the printer. Color: 47.6 seconds or less (LT/A4 LEF)
n Half speed mode: Low speed mode that enables better fusing NOTE:Fist print is defined as the duration taken after receiving the
for thick paper (over 105g/m2) envelopes, start command until outputting the first print. It is applicable
and OHP sheet. when a feeder is selected in the standard mode. (Not applied
o Print Speed: See Table 1-1. during the process control operation.)
o Warm-up time: Within 300 seconds
(at 22 degree Celsius, 58% Rh, rated voltage)
o Paper aligning: Single side aligning (front side) for all sizes Notes:
(both standard tray (MSI) and each cassette) *1. The minimum size available for FD ejection is 182 mm toward paper
o Consumables: feeding direction.
*2. FU*2 means face-up ejection for OHP sheet, thick paper, and envelopes.
n TONER CARTRIDGE (Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow)
o Dimensions (without option):
n DRUM CARTRIDGE (including one WASTE TONER BOX)
728 (W)* mm x 641 (D)* mm x 490 (H) mm (tolerances: ± 1%)
n WASTE TONER BOX
* When the standard tray (MSI) and Output tray (FU) are stored.)
n OIL ROLL
o Weight: 68.4 kg ± 1% (without option)
o Regular replaced parts:
o Voltage: 110V/120V ± 10%, 50/60Hz ± 3Hz
n MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY
220V/240V ± 10%, 50/60Hz ± 3Hz
n Air filter (replaced with the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY
n 2ND BTR ASSEMBLY o Power consumption, Rated current: See Table 1-5.
o Paper Output:
Table 1-5. Power Consumption Specifications
n Face-down (FD):
Power consumption • Average: 400Wh or less
250 sheets (B5/EXE or larger, up to 105g/m2or 28lb Operating (color)
• Maximum: 1100W or less (Fuser: On)
n Face-up (FU):
• Average: 500Wh or less
150 sheets (smaller than A4), 50 sheets (A4 or larger) Operating (B/W)
• Maximum: 1100W or less (Fuser: On)
See Table 1-4 for the FD availability for each paper size. • Average: 250Wh or less
Standby mode • Maximum: 1000W or less (Fuser: On)
Table 1-4. Face-Down Output Availability 100W or less (Fuser: Off)
Paper Size FD Availability Paper Size FD Availability *1 • Average: 200Wh or less
Normal paper A3W Available HLT Unavailable Energy save mode
• Maximum: 1000W or less (Fuser: On)
*1
A3 Available LG Available 100W or less (Fuser: Off)
A4 Available EXE Available • Average: 45Wh or less
Energy save mode
A5 Unavailable GLG Available • Maximum: 1000W or less (Fuser: On)
*2
100W or less (Fuser: Off)
B4 Available GLT Available
Rated current • 100 V: 11A or less (at rated voltage)
B5 Available B(LD) Available
• 115V: 10A or less (at rated voltage)
LT Available F4 Available
• 240V: 5A or less (at rated voltage)
I-B5 Unavailable
Special paper OHP sheet FU *2 C10 FU *2 Notes:
Card stock FU *2 DL FU *2 *1. Saves more energy than in standby mode.Time required for warning up is
MON FU *2 C6 FU *2 shorter.
*2. Completely non-operating condition. Complies with the Energy Star.
o Product life
n Printer:
Approximately 180,000 printed pages on A4 LEF (450,000
images) or five years, whichever comes first.
n Standard tray (MSI): 72,000 sheets
n 250 sheets x 3 feeders: 135,000 sheets (45,000 sheets x 3)
o Acoostic Noise: Operating = 54.8dB (A) or less
Stand-by = 38.3dB (A) or less
Energy Save mode 1 = 38.3dB (A) or less
Energy Save mode 2 = 35.0dB (A) or less
o Ozone emission: 0.02 ppm (time waited average value) or less.
o Toxicity: Photo conductor, toner, carrier, plastic material
have no effect on human body.
1.2.2 Paper Specification n Paper with labels that come off and stick easily.
o Paper specifications: See Table 1-6. n Paper with glue, staples, or paper clips attached.
n Special ink-jet paper (Super Fine Paper, glossy film, and so
Table 1-6. Paper Specifications on.)
Paper Type
n OHP sheets for other color laser printers, monochrome
Recommended paper 4024 paper (B/W), X-pression paper (color)
printers, and photocopiers.
Normal Paper Normal copier paper, Recycled paper,
60g/m 2 - 105g/m 2 (16lb - 28lb) n Paper that has gone through other color laser printers,
Special Paper OHP film, Card stock, Labels, Color paper, Thick monochrome printers, and photocopiers.
paper (105g/m2 - 220g/m2), DTP paper , Envelopes
n Pasted paper
NOTE: lb: Ream Weight = lb/500sheets/17” x 22”
1g/m2 = 0.2659763 lb
NOTE: Before purchasing a large amount of paper, try it out and check
that it is properly fed.
NOTE: Avoid using the types of paper listed below to prevent abnormal
printing, paper jam, and printer malfunction.
n Carbon paper, non-carbon paper, thermal paper,
impact paperm, acidic paper
n Paper that has gone through a thermal or an ink-jet printer.
n Paper that is too thick or thin.
n Wet (damp) paper
n Paper to which a special coating has been applied, or colored
paper that has gone through surface process.
n Paper that has been lubricated (too smooth or slippery).
n Paper whose texture is different on the front and back.
n Paper with holes for binders and perforations.
n Paper with irregular shape or not cut with right angles.
4 m m
o Printable area: n When the standard universal cassette or large capacity paper
Paper whose width is 304.8mm (12”) or shorter: From the edge cassette unit is used.
Paper whose width is longer than 304.8mm (12”)*: From the point
with a margin of 5mm 3 0 4 .8 m m (1 2 ")
4 m m 2 9 6 .8 m m (1 1 .7 ") 4 m m
4 m m
* When loading paper whose width is more than 304.8 mm (12”), the
standard cassette (MSI) is shifted and print position starts with a
margin of 5 mm from the paper edge (a). This change is applied
to paper loaded from the A3W cassette.
4 5 7 .2 m m
4 3 1 .8 m m
3 3 0 .2 m m (1 3 ")
P r in ta b le a r e a
3 2 0 m m (1 2 ,6 ")
(1 8 ")
(1 7 ")
P a p e r fe e d in g d ir e c tio n
4 m m
2 9 7 m m (1 1 .7 ")
4 5 7 .2 m m
P r in ta b le
(a ) a re a S id e g u id e p o s itio n fo r p a p e r w h o s e w id th is 3 0 4 .8 m m ( 1 2 " ) o r le s s
M a x im u m s iz e o f p a p e r : 3 0 4 .8 m m ( 1 2 " ) w id th x 4 5 7 .2 m m ( 1 8 " ) le n g th
(1 8 ")
P r in ta b le a r e a : 2 9 6 .8 m m ( 1 1 .7 " ) w id th x 4 4 9 .2 m m ( 1 7 .7 " ) le n g th
P a p e r fe e d in g d ir e c tio n
G u a r a n te e d p r in t a r e a : 2 9 6 .8 m m ( 1 1 .7 " ) w id th x 4 3 1 .8 m m ( 1 7 " ) le n g th
Figure 1-4. Printable Area 2
S id e g u id e p o s itio n fo r p a p e r w h o s e w id th is 3 0 4 .8 m m o r s h o rte r
S id e g u id e p o s itio n fo r p a p e r w h o s e w id th is m o r e th a n 3 0 4 .8 m m
L e n g th b e tw e e n th e g u id e s is 1 2 .6 m m
M a x im u m s iz e o f p a p e r : 3 3 0 .2 m m ( 1 3 " ) w id th x 4 5 7 .2 m m ( 1 8 " ) le n g th
P r in ta b le a r e a : 3 2 0 .0 m m ( 1 2 .6 " ) w id th x 4 4 9 .2 m m ( 1 7 .7 " ) le n g th
G u a r a n te e d p r in t a r e a : 2 9 7 m m ( 1 1 .7 " ) w id th x 4 3 1 .8 m m ( 1 7 " ) le n g th
P a p e r fe e d in g d ir e c tio n
Table 1-8. Paper Feed Reliability
Recommended
paper
Normal paper Special paper * P r in t a r e a f
o Standard paper tray
Paper jam rate 1/500 or less 1/100 or less 1/100
Multiple feeding rate 1/80 or less 1/50 or less 1/50
o Standard universal cassette/Large capacity paper cassette (option)
d
Paper jam rate 1/3,000 or less 1/2,000 or less
Multiple feeding rate 1/800 or less 1/500 or less
o A3W cassette (option) e
Paper jam rate 1/2,000 or less
Multiple feeding rate 1/500 or less
Figure 1-5. Paper Skew
NOTE:Paper jam or multiple feeding occurred to the top sheet of an Main scan direction (|c-d|) ±1.5mm(f=196mm) ±3.0mm(f=406mm)
added stack of paper is ignored. Sub scan direction (|a-b|) ±2.0mm(e=271mm) ±2.0mm(f=271mm)
o Durability:
n Printer itself:
180,000 sheets (450,000 images) A4 LEF or 5 years, whichever
comes first. Parts regularly replaced by the service is ignored.
* 450,000 for monochrome print only. In color printing, one page is formed
with 4 images, and the value “180,000” sheets is figured out in the
condition that the job ratio of monochrome and color printings is 1:1.
n Standard tray (MSI): 72,000 sheets
n 250sheets x 3 feeders: 135,000 sheets (45,000 sheets x 3)
o MTTR: Within 30 minutes (average)
o Curl height at ejection:
Less than ± 15mm (Color printing with the image ratio of 5 % in non-
aligned condition, which varies depending on the image rate and
aligning pattern.)
T o P u ll o u t th e
s ta n d a rd p a p e r
c a s s e tte u n it w h e n
p u ttin g p a p e r .
* 5 1 1 m m w ith th e fa c e - u p tr a y in s ta lle d .
* Without condensation.
o Storage air pressure (altitude):
0 - 2500m (0 up to 15000m is possible during air shipping, but the
air pressure in the cargo room must be 0.7 hPA or more.)
o Drop test: See Table 1-11.
o Resistance to vibration:
n Frequency: 2 - 500 Hz
n Acceleration: 12.6 m/s 2 (on a vibrating board)*1
n Direction: 3 directions (X, Y, Z) *2
n Duration: 30 minutes (single way)
*1.Overall rms value
*2.Z: vertical, X and Y: horizontal
o Resistance to vibration:
n Frequency: 5 - 100 Hz
n Acceleration: 0.7G
n Direction: 3 directions (X, Y, Z) *2
n Duration: 50 minutes (single way) for each direction
Table 1-17. Fuser Oil Roll Unit Specifications Table 1-18. Waste Toner Box
Specifications Specifications
Formation Oil roll Formation Waste toner box and others
Life 20,000 sheets *1 Life 20,000 sheets *1
Dimensions (WxDxH) • Unpacked: 75 mm(W) x 421 mm (D) x 48 mm (H) Dimensions (WxDxH) • Unpacked: 80 mm(W) x 444 mm (D) x 131 mm (H)
*2 • Packed: 160 mm(W) x 600 mm (D) x 130 mm (H) *2 • Packed: 149 mm(W) x 495 mm (D) x 192 mm (H)
Weight • Unpacked: 0.68 kg Weight • Unpacked: 0.45 kg
• Packed: 1 kg • Packed: 0.87 kg
Environmental Same as for Toner Cartridge Environmental Same as for Toner Cartridge
condition for storage condition for storage
and transportation and transportation
*1. Varies depending on the operating conditions, as follows: *1. Defined under the conditions that the image ratio is 5% on A4
Operating rate is 120 sheets / day or more: 20,000 sheets (LEF) printing at 4P/J. Life varies depending on the image ratio
Operating rate is 120 sheets / day or less: 11,000 sheets and printer usage, weather continuous or intermittent printing.
*2. Tolerances for dimensions and weight are both ± 1% *2. Tolerances for dimensions and weight are both ± 1%
6 4 1 m m (D )
5 6 0 m m (W )
4 9 0 m m (H )
7 2 8 m m (W )
1 3 6 7 .4 m m (M a x .)
1.3 Interface Specifications Figure below shows the locations of these interfaces.
P a p e r S o u rc e P a p e r S iz e M a n u a l F e e d O r ie n ta t io n
R IT e c h C o p ie s M P T r a y S iz e O u t B in
M e n u Ite m V a lu e E n te r
O n L in e F o rm F e e d C o n tin u e S e le c T y p e
H I J K L M N O
R e s e t A lt
o OneTouch mode 1/2 2. Scroll the setting value list by pressing the OneTouch button*.
There are two OneTouch modes, OneTouch mode 1 and 2. This
mode enables users to make selection by pressing a button in the 3. When the desired value is indicated, exit the OneTouch mode, and
panel design matrix. the new value is stored.
o SelecType mode 4. To return to the On Line status from the OneTouch mode, perform
The SelecType mode has two levels. one of the followings:
1. Setting menu 1) Press the On Line button.
Panel setting items fall into numbers of categories called setting 2) Perform panel setting initialization.
menus. 3) Run a status sheet.
2. Setting item 4) Press the SelecType button.
This is the lowest level of the panel setting mode. Some items
have values to be selected and others are just executed directly. * “Menu”, “Item”, “Value” and “Enter” buttons serve as the OneTouch buttons
in this mode.
SelecType mode: NOTE: Keeping the Value button (+ Alt button) depressed for a
certain length of time causes the values to change
NOTE: SelecType mode is effective when no error has occurred.
continuously.
1. To enter the SelecType mode, perform one of the followings: 5) In the value select mode, press the Enter button when the
desired value is displayed. The value is stored as the new setting
1) Press the SelecType button to enter the SelecType mode or excuted directly. (For the value previously set, pressing the
through the One touch mode 1 and 2. Enter button has no effect.)
2) Press the Menu button, Item, Value, or Enter button. 6) In the itme select mode, pressing the Menu button brings back
NOTE:SelecType mode is effective when no error has occurred. the setting menu select mode and the next menu is displayed.
7) In the value select mode, pressing the Menu or Item button, the
2. Refer to the descriptions below to operate the SelecType mode. item select mode is brought back.
1) In the setting menu select mode, select the desired menu by 3. To return to the On Line status from the SelecType mode, perform
pressing the Menu button. The menus are shown left-aligned on one of the followings:
the LCD.
2) To enter the setting item select mode, press the Item button. The 1) Press the On Line button.
initial item appears in the format below: 2) Perform panel setting initialization.
3) Run a status sheet.
“Setting Item = Current setting value *” 4) Press the SelecType button.
NOTE: The trailing * means the current setting value.
3) In the setting item select mode, press the Item button to bring up
the desired item. With each push of the Item button, the item is
switches to the next item, again shown in the format below:
M e n u Ite m /V a lu e /E n te r
O n L in e S e ttin g m e n u S e le c T y p e
s e le c t m o d e
O n e -to u c n
M e n u s e ttin g
S e le c T y p e Ite m M e n u
O n e T o u c h
m o d e
Ite m S e ttin g ite m
s e le c t m o d e
In itia liz e
E n te r
p a n e l s e ttin g s . V a lu e
S to r e in E E P R O M
o r p e r fo r m p r o c e s s in g .
E x e c u te te s t
p r in t/c le a n in g p r in t M e n u
Ite m O n e T o u c h m o d e
E n te r
V a lu e S e ttin g v a lu e
s e le c t m o d e
O n L in e s ta tu s S e le c T y p e M o d e
O n - L in e s ta tu s P a n e l s e ttin g m o d e
Table 1-26. Panel Setting Menu List (3/6) Table 1-27. Panel Setting Menu List (4/6)
Menu Item Value Menu Item Value
Parallel Menu Speed Fast, Normal LJ4 Menu Form 5∼ 60*3 ∼ 64*2 ∼ 128 lines
Bi-D Nibble, ECP, Off (Continued) Source SymSet*5 0 ∼ 277 ∼ 3199
Buffer Size Normal, Maximum, Minimum Dest SymSet*5 0 ∼ 277 ∼ 3199
AUX1 Menu*4 Buffer Size Normal, Maximum, Minimum GL2 Menu GL-Mode LJ4GL2, GLlike
AUX2 Menu*4 Buffer Size Normal, Maximum, Minimum Scale Off, A0, A1, A2, A3
ESC/Page Auto CR On, Off Origin Corner, Center
Menu*16 Auto FF On, Off Pen Pen0, Pen1, Pen2*6, Pen3*6, Pen4*6, Pen5*6,
CR Function CR, CR+LF Pen6*6
LF Function CR+LF, LF End Butt, Square, Triangular, Round
FF Function CR+FF, FF Join Mitered, Miteredbeveled, Triangualr, Round,
Beveled, None
Error Code Ignore, Space
Pen0 0.05 ∼ 0.35 ∼ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm
Avoid Error Off, On
Pen1 0.05 ∼ 0.35 ∼ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm
Low Resolution No, Yes
Pen2*6 0.05 ∼ 0.35 ∼ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm
LJ4 Menu Font Source Resident, DIMM, Download
Pen3*6 0.05 ∼ 0.35 ∼ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm
(Continues to Font Number 0 ∼ available (Max 65535)
the next Pen4*6 0.05 ∼ 0.35 ∼ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm
Pitch*20 0.44 ∼ 10.00 ∼ 99.99 cpi step 0.01 cpi
table.) Pen5*6 0.05 ∼ 0.35 ∼ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm
Height*20 4.00 ∼ 12.00 ∼ 999.75 pt step 0.25 pt
Pen6*6 0.05 ∼ 0.35 ∼ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm
SymSet IBM-US, Roman-8, ECM94-1, 8859-2 ISO, 8859-9
ISO, IBM-DN, PcMultiling, PcE.Europe, PcTk437, ESCP2 Menu Font Courier, Prestige, Roman, Sans serif, Roman
WiAnsi, WiE.Europe, WiTurkish, DeskTop, (Continues to T, Orator S, Sans H, Script,
PsText, Velnternati,VeUS, MsPublishin, Math-8, the next table.) OCR A, OCR B
PsMath, VeMath, PiFont, Legal, UK, ANSI ASCII, Pitch 10 cpi, 12 cpi,15 cpi, Prop.
Swedis2, Italian, Spanish, German, Norweg1, Condensed Off, On
French2, Windows, Pclcelandic* 5, PcLt774*5,
T.Margin 0.40 ∼ 0.50 ∼ 1.50 inch step 0.05 inch
PcTurk1*5*9, PcPortugues*5, PcEt850*5,
PcTurk2*5*9, PcCanFrench*5, PcSl437*5, Text 1 ∼ 62*3 ∼ 66*2 ∼ available (Max:111) Lines
PcNordic*5, 8859-3 ISO*5, 8859-4 ISO*5, CGTable PcUSA, Italic, PcMultilin, PcPortugue,
WiBaltic*5, WiEstonian*5, WiLatvian *5, Mazowia PcCanFrenc, PcNordic, PcTurkish2,
*5*12, CodeMJK*5*12, BpBRASCII*5, BpAbicomp*5, PcE.Europe, BpBRASCII, BpAbicomp,
PcGK437*5*10, PcGk851*5, PcGk869*5*25,8859-7 PcSl437*5, PcTurkish1*5, Pclcelandic*5, 8859-9
ISO*5*25, WiGreek*5, Europe3*5, PcCy855*5*11, ISO*5, Mazowia*5, CodeMJK*5, PcGk437*5,
PcCy866*5*11, PcLt866*5, 8859-5 ISO*5, PcGK851*5, PcGk869*5, 8859-7 ISO*5,
WiCyrillic*5, Bulgarian*5*11, PcUkr866*5, PcCy855*5, PcCy866*5, Bulgarian*5,
Hebrew7*5, 8859-8 ISO*5, Hebrew8*5, PcHe862*5, PcUkr866*5, Hebrew7*5, Hebrew8*5,
Arabic8*5, PcAr864*5, 8859-6 ISO*5, OCR A*5, PcAr864*5, PcHe862*5
OCR B*5
Table 1-28. Panel Setting Menu List (5/6) Table 1-29. Panel Setting Menu List (6/6)
Menu Item Value Menu Item Value
ESCP2 Menu Country USA, France, Germany, UK, Denmark, Sweden, 1239X Menu Font Courier, Prestige, Gothic, Orator, Script,
(Continued) Italy, Spain1, Japan, Norway, Denmark2, Spain2, Presentor, Sans serif
LatinAmeric, Korea, Legal Pitch 10 cpi, 12cpi,15cpi, 17cpi, 20cpi, 24cpi, Prop.
Auto CR On, Off Code Page 437, 850, 860, 863, 865
Auto LF Off, On T. Margin 0.30 ∼ 0.40 ∼ 1.50 inch step 0.05 inch
Bit Image Dark, Light, Barcode Text 1 ∼ 63*3 ∼ 67 *3∼ available (Max:111) Lines
ZeroChar 0, 0 Auto CR Off, On
FX Menu Font Courier, Prestige, Roman, Sans serif, Script, Auto LF Off, On
Orator S, OCR A, OCR B
Alt. Graphics Off, On
Pitch 10 cpi, 12 cpi,15 cpi, Prop.
Bit Image Dark, Light
Condensed Off, On
ZeroChar 0, 0
T. Margin 0.40 ∼ 0.50 ∼ 1.50 inch step 0.05 inch
Character Set 1*3, 2*2
Text 1 ∼ 62*3 ∼ 66*2 ∼ available (Max:111) Lines
Maintenance 2nd BTR Reset
CGTable PcUSA, Italic, PcMultilin, PcPortugue,
Menu*15 IBT Cleaner Reset
PcCanFrenc, PcNordic, PcTurkish2, PcE.Europe,
BpBRASCII, BpAbicomp Fuser Unit Reset
Country USA, France, Germany, UK, Denmark, Sweden, Page Count Clear
Italy, Spain1, Japan, Norway, Denmark2, Spain2, Engine Status Sheet
LatinAmeric
Auto CR On, Off
Auto LF Off, On
Bit Image Dark, Light, Barcode
ZeroChar 0, 0
*10.Appears only if NLSP EDG OEM Scalable Font ROM for Greek is
installed.
*11.Appears only if NLSP EDG OEM Scalable Font ROM for Cyrillic is
installed.
*12.Appears only if NLSP EDG OEM Scalable Font ROM for Latin is
installed.
o Parallel Menu
1. Buffer Size
Sets the amount of installed memory that operates as a receive
l Normal: Balances between draw processing and buffer.
buffer. Specifically, sets the balance between the amount of
l Maximum: Allocates more memory for use as receive buffer.
memory used for draw processing and the amount used as
l Minimum : AlIocates less memory for use as receive buffer.
receive buffer.
o Maintenance Menu
This display appears only if the maintenance menu is available for
selection (only if the operator uses undocumented sequence when
switching on power). Switching power off and then back on will
remove the maintenance menu from the display (so that it can no
longer be selected by the user). This menu is provided only for use
by maintenance engineers.
2
OPERATING PRINCIPLES
EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B
Contents
PRINT PROCESS .......................................................................................... 1 Fusing-II .................................................................................................. 37
Print Process Overview ............................................................................. 1 Paper Exit................................................................................................ 39
Print Process - Major Components ........................................................... 2 Drives ...................................................................................................... 40
Print Process Description .......................................................................... 3 Electrical.................................................................................................. 42
(1) Charge ............................................................................................. 3 OPERATION MODES .................................................................................. 44
(2) Exposure .......................................................................................... 4
CONTROLS ................................................................................................. 45
(3) Development .................................................................................... 5
Paper Size Control .................................................................................. 45
(4) First Transfer (Drum → Belt) .......................................................... 8
Paper Tray Selection Control .................................................................. 46
(5) Cleaning (Drum)............................................................................... 9
OHP Side Detection Control ................................................................... 47
(6) Repeat (Forming a complete full-color toner image)...................... 10
ROS Control ............................................................................................ 48
(7) Second Transfer (Belt → Paper) .................................................. 11
Scanner Motor Rotation ...................................................................... 48
(8) Detach............................................................................................ 13
Light Quantity Control.......................................................................... 48
(9) Cleaning (Belt) ............................................................................... 13
Process Control....................................................................................... 49
(10) Fusing .......................................................................................... 14
Electric Potential Control ..................................................................... 49
PRINT DATA FLOW .................................................................................... 15 Toner Density Control (PCDC)............................................................ 50
Data Flow ................................................................................................ 15 Toner Density Control (ADC) .............................................................. 51
DRIVER POWER TRANSMISSION PATH .................................................. 16 ADC Solenoid Operation ..................................................................... 52
Process Motor Assembly......................................................................... 16 Process Sequence ............................................................................. 52
P/H Motor Assembly................................................................................ 17 Xerographic Control ................................................................................ 53
Dispense Motor Assembly....................................................................... 18 BCR/Erase Lamp Control.................................................................... 53
Rotary Motor Assembly ........................................................................... 18 Drum Cartridge Replacement.............................................................. 54
Gear Layout............................................................................................. 19 Drum Cartridge End of Life Detection ................................................. 55
PAPER TRANSPORTATION....................................................................... 20 Waste Toner Box Full Detection.......................................................... 55
Paper Transportation Path (No Option)................................................... 20 Developer Control ................................................................................... 56
Home Position Detection..................................................................... 56
MAIN COMPONENTS.................................................................................. 21
Toner Cartridge Detection Position ..................................................... 57
Paper Tray............................................................................................... 22
Toner Cartridge: Old/New Detection ................................................... 57
Paper Feeder .......................................................................................... 23
Development Position ......................................................................... 57
Multi Sheet Inserter (MSI) ....................................................................... 24
Development Control: Detection Methods........................................... 58
Paper Transportation............................................................................... 26
IBT Control .............................................................................................. 60
Xerographics I ......................................................................................... 28
First Transfer (Drum → Belt)................................................................ 60
Xerographics II ........................................................................................ 29
Second Transfer (Belt → Paper)........................................................ 61
Development ........................................................................................... 31
Discharging ......................................................................................... 64
IBT-I......................................................................................................... 33
Belt Cleaning ....................................................................................... 64
IBT-II........................................................................................................ 34
1-UP/2-UP Control .................................................................................. 67
Fusing-I ................................................................................................... 35
EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B
Fuser Control........................................................................................... 68
Fuser Control Method.......................................................................... 68
Warm-up Control ................................................................................. 68
Mode Control: READY, LIGHT SLEEP, DEEP SLEEP ....................... 69
Printing Mode Control.......................................................................... 69
Not Ready State Detection During Printing ......................................... 69
Oil Roll Control .................................................................................... 70
Fuser Fan Control ............................................................................... 72
Detection Controls in Fuser ................................................................. 72
CONTROLLER OPERATING PRINCIPLES................................................ 76
EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B
2.1.3 Print Process Description o The BCR is always in contact with the surface of the drum, driven by the
drum rotation. The BCR is a conductive roll, receiving discharge voltage
from the HVPS. The discharge voltage is negative DC voltage to which AC
2.1.3.1 (1) Charge voltage has been superimposed. The discharge occurs in the very small
gap between the BCR and the drum surface. The drum surface is uniformly
In the Charge step, the surface of the drum rotates at a constant speed charged (negative) with DC bias voltage. The drum surface consists of
and is uniformly charged (negative) by the discharge of the BCR (Bias photoconductive material (on the surface) and an aluminum cylinder
Charge Roll) in the Drum Cartridge. (inside the drum). (The photoconductive material becomes conductive
when it receives light; it becomes an insulator in the dark.)
2.1.3.2 (2) Exposure The laser beam irradiated on the drum surface generates electron-
hole pairs in the photoconductive layer. (Excited electrons create a
In the exposure step, the system scans the drum surface (negatively hole in the conductive band.) The electrons are attracted by the
charged) with a laser beam and forms an invisible electrostatic latent electric field and move toward the inner conductor of the drum and
image on the drum surface. flow into it. The holes move toward the outside surface of the
o The printer controller outputs the data (image data) to the laser photoconductive layer and recombine with the negative charges
beam unit. As determined by the data from the printer controller, the (electrons) on the drum surface, thus decreasing the negative
laser beam unit emits a laser beam onto the drum surface, the area charges on the surface. The resultant less negatively charged areas
of which is determined by data from the printer controller. (That is, on the drum surface forms an invisible electrostatic latent image
areas on the drum surface where the laser is emitted will be (printed image).
developed with toner; areas on the drum surface where the laser is
not emitted will not be developed.)
The laser beam is emitted from the laser diode in the ROS
Assembly. The laser beam goes through the Scanner Assembly in
the ROS Assembly, the rotating polygon mirror, fixed mirror and
lens, and scans the drum surface from one end to the other in the
axis direction of the drum.
o The carrier looses its electrical charges. This occurs because the
surface of a carrier particle may be covered with a toner particle or
may be damaged by agitation. To maintain the electrical charge of
carrier particles, a small amount of carrier is mixed in the toner;
when the toner is dispensed, carrier is also supplied.
The carrier in the Developer Assembly, however, is collected into a
different chamber in the Toner Cartridge, so that the developer
(mostly carrier) is replaced little by little, resulting in a constant
electrical charge being maintained. This is called the trickle
development method. The trickle development method uses the
rotation of the Rotary Frame Assembly.
The trickle development process is as follows:
1. An L-shaped pipe is inserted in the developer.
2. A small amount of carrier moves into the pipe.
3. The carrier is sucked in and moves deeper into the pipe.
4. The carrier is collected in the Toner Cartridge.
(Laser beam)
(On Belt)
(On Paper)
Figure 2-22.
Transmission in Rotary Motor Assembly
Figure 2-21.
Drive Transmission in Dispense Motor Assembly
Laser beam
P R E -R E G I. R O L L A S S Y
Figure 2-24. Paper Transportation Path Layout Figure 2-25. Paper Transportation Flow
2.5.3 Multi Sheet Inserter (MSI) (d) MSI Short N/P Sensor
1. MSI Assembly When the MSI N/P Actuator position changes, the MSI Short N/
The MSI Assembly feeds paper from the MSI Tray. The MSI P Sensor detects paper on the MSI Assembly. The MSI Short N/
Assembly consists of the MSI Edge Sensor, Pick Up Solenoid, MSI P Sensor only functions when the printer controller sends a
Clutch and others. signal indicating short paper size (shorter than 150mm) in the
feeding direction.
(a) MSI Edge Sensor
(e) MSI Long N/P Sensor
The MSI Edge Sensor detects the paper interval (from the
bottom edge of the preceding sheet to the top edge of the next The MSI Long N/P Sensor detects paper on the MSI Assembly
sheet) in the 2UP mode. If the paper interval is too short, printing by detecting the light reflected from the paper’s surface. The
is not done properly in the 2UP mode. If the paper interval sensor is horizontally attached to the MSI Tray Assembly. It can
detected by the MSI Edge Sensor is shorter than the detect light from the light emitter which is reflected on the
predetermined interval, the system turns off the MSI Clutch. This paper’s surface. (A transparent OHP sheet can be detected by
causes temporarily cuts the driving force to the Pick Up Rolls so this method.) The sensor only functions when the printer
that the paper transportation timing is adjusted. controller sends a signal indicating long paper size (150mm or
longer) in the feeding direction.
(b) Pick Up Solenoid
(g) Retard Pad Assembly
The MSI Roll Assembly operation (rotation/stop) is controlled by
controlling the rotation of the Pick Up Cam Gear. When the Pick Up Roll pulls out a sheet of paper, the friction
between the paper and the Retard Pad Assembly prevents more
(c) MSI Clutch than one sheet of paper from being pulled out.
If the paper interval detected by the MSI Edge Sensor is shorter (h) Pick Up Roll
than the predetermined interval, the paper transportation timing
needs to be adjusted. If the paper interval is too short, the MSI The MSI Roll Assembly receives the force from the Pick Up
Clutch temporarily cuts off the driving force to the Pick Up Rolls Solenoid and the MSI Clutch and starts rotating and the Pick Up
transportation timing. (to adjust the paper interval) and corrects Roll pulls out a sheet of paper. Both the Pick Up Gear and the
the paper. Pick Up Cam Gear have a notch that, after rotating once,
disengages the Pick Up Cam Gear and MSI Gear, thus causing
the MSI Roll Assembly to stop rotating. This mechanism
ensures that only one sheet of paper is pulled out.
2.5.4 Paper Transportation paper (such as an OHP sheet) may go through the Registration
Metal Roll and the Registration Rubber Roll without making a
1. Main P/H Assembly loop. By turning on the Registration Brake Clutch, the
The Main P/H Assembly consists of the following components: Registration Metal Roll and the Registration Rubber Roll are
n Pre-Registration Roll Assembly constricted and the paper cannot go through—and that causes a
paper loop.
n Registration Clutch
(d) The Registration Clutch transmits the driving force from the P/H
n Pre-Registration Clutch
Motor Assembly to the Registration Metal Roll and Registration
n Registration Brake Clutch Rubber Roll so that the paper and the IBT Belt Assembly are
n Registration Sensor properly positioned for a secondary image transfer.
n Front OHP Sensor (e) The Pre-Registration Clutch transmits the driving force from the
P/H Motor Assembly to the Pre-Registration Roll Assembly.
n Rear OHP Sensor
n Registration Brake Clutch (f) The Registration Sensor detects when the top of the paper has
reached the Registration Metal Roll and the Registration Rubber
n Registration Metal Roll Roll. To determine the paper size, the system detects the
n Registration Rubber Roll bottom edge of the paper. (The paper size is determined by the
system keeping track of the time from when the Registration
(a) The Registration Metal Roll and Registration Rubber Roll pull Clutch is turned on to when the Registration Sensor detects no
out the paper in synchronization with the IBT Belt Assembly paper.)
timing so that the paper will be positioned properly for the
complete toner image on the IBT Belt Assembly to be correctly (g) The printer detects the front and back of an OHP sheet* from the
transferred onto the paper. combined results of the Front OHP Sensor and the Rear OHP
(b) Pre-Registration Roll Assembly transfers paper from the paper Sensor. (For more details, see “7.3 OHP Side Detection Control”
tray or the MSI Assembly onto the Registration Metal Roll and in Section 10.)
Registration Rubber Roll. Until the top of the paper reaches the *The printer can use EPSON Color Laser Transparencies
Registration Metal Roll and Registration Rubber Roll and until (S041175, S041174) only.
those rolls start rotating, the Pre-Registration Roll Assembly (h) The resistor and the capacitor installed on the front of the Main
keep transferring the rear part of the paper by making a paper P/H Assembly maintain the potential of the Registration Metal
loop and correcting the skew at the top of the paper. Roll at the time of image transfer. If the Registration Metal Roll is
(c) The Registration Brake Clutch controls (applies the brake to) the directly grounded, the potential of the paper escapes to the
Registration Metal Roll. ground via the Registration Metal Roll. This means that the
When the top of the paper reaches the Registration Metal Roll paper will not have enough potential for an image to be
and Registration Rubber Roll it forms a loop. However, hard transferred correctly.
2.5.5 Xerographics I (d) To form a proper electrostatic latent image on the drum surface,
the laser scanning timing and the writing timing of the image
1. ROS Assembly data must be coordinated. The SOS Sensor on the SOS PWB
The ROS (Raster Output Scanner) Assembly outputs laser beam to (Start Of Scan Printed Wiring Board) converts the laser beam
form an electrostatic latent image on the drum’s surface. The ROS into electrical signals (SOS signals) which detect the initial
Assembly consists of the following components. position (scan start position) in each line that the laser will scan.
n LD Assembly n Lens
n Scanner Assembly n Mirror
n SOS PWB n Window
3. Rotary Sensor
The Rotary Sensor detects the home position of the Rotary Frame
Assembly. The Developer control is done based on the home
position.
(For more details, see “7.8 Developer Control.”)
2.5.8 IBT-I Process Motor runs, the transfer reference marks are alternately
detected. This prevents the image from being transferred onto
1. Transfer Assembly the same location on the belt all the time—something that leads
The Transfer Assembly consists of the following components: to image degradation.
n 1st BTR n IBT Drive Roll Assembly (f) A one-color toner image on the drum is transferred onto the IBT
n Back Up Roll n TRO Sensor Belt Assembly. This process is repeated four times (for four
n Contact Roll n IBT Belt Assembly colors). At the end, a 4-color overlaid toner image has been
formed on the IBT Belt Assembly. When the complete toner
(a) The 1st BTR (First Bias Transfer Roll) is a conductive roll, facing image is formed on the belt, the 2nd BTR provides negative
the drum. (The IBT Belt Assembly is in the middle.) The 1st BTR transfer voltage to the belt and the belt transfers the image (of 4-
transfers the toner image on the drum to the IBT Belt Assembly. color toner) onto the paper (2nd transfer).
(b) The Contact Roll is a metal roll (small diameter). It is in contact
with the Back Up Roll and provides the 2nd transfer voltage to
the Back Up Roll.
(c) The Back Up Roll is a conductive roll, facing (from inside) the
2nd BTR. (The IBT Belt Assembly is in the middle). When the
paper passes through, the Back Up Roll provides the 2nd
transfer voltage to the paper from the inside of the IBT Belt
Assembly.
(d) The IBT Drive Roll Assembly transfers the driving force of the
Process Motor Assembly to the IBT Belt Assembly. (The
Process Motor Assembly receives the driving force from the
Process WDD Assembly.)
(e) The silver marks (TRO marks) is pasted at the rear end of the
IBT Belt Assembly. This is because the toner images transferred
onto the IBT Belt Assembly must match precisely. The TRO
Sensor detects this mark every time the IBT Belt Assembly
makes one rotation. When the sensor detects the mark, the
system waits for a predetermined period and then generates a
TRO signal (which indicates the reference point and the image
transfer reference point to form an image.) The IBT Belt
Assembly has two TRO marks. As a result, every time the
Figure 2-33. IBT-I
2.5.9 IBT-II (a) The Cleaning Blade moves forward to the IBT Belt Assembly
after the 2nd transfer process and scrapes off the remaining
1. 2nd BTR Assembly toner on the belt.
The 2nd BTR Assembly consists of the following components: (b) The Auger transfers the scraped toner to the Auger High
n 2nd BTR Assembly.
n 2nd BTR Cleaner (The Auger High Assembly transfers the toner to the Waste
n Detach Saw (Charge Removable board) Toner Box.)
(a) The 2nd BTR (Second Bias Transfer Roll) is a conductive roll. It
faces the Back Up Roll from outside the belt. (The IBT Belt
Assembly is in the middle.) The 2nd BTR induces the transfer
voltage from the voltage provided by the Back Up Roll and
transfers the toner image on the IBT Belt Assembly onto the
paper (2nd transfer).
(b) The 2nd BTR Cleaner is in contact with the 2nd BTR and
scrapes off the toner from the surface of the 2nd BTR. (The
scraped toner is collected in the toner chamber in the 2nd BTR
Assembly.)
(c) The Detach Saw (Charge Removal Plate) provides the charges
on the back of the paper and neutralizes/removes the charges
on the paper.
2.5.10 Fusing-I Assembly fails, the contact point in the Thermostat opens,
shutting off the power supply to the H/R Heater and P/R
1. Fuser Assembly Heater (secondary overheating prevention mechanism).
The Fuser Assembly fuses the toner on the paper with heat and • The Thermal Fuse is connected in series to the power supply
pressure, and transfers the paper in and out, to and from the Fuser circuits of the H/R Heater and P/R Heater. If the primary and
Assembly. The Fuser Assembly consists of the Main Fuser secondary overheating prevention mechanisms fail, the Ther-
Assembly and the Fuser Tray Assembly. mal Fuse is melted by the heat, shutting off the power supply
to the H/R Heater and P/R Heater (tertiary overheating pre-
n Main Fuser Assembly vention mechanism).
The Main Fuser Assembly consists of the Heat Roll, Pressure • The Fuser Exit Sensor detects a paper pass from the position
Roll, H/R Heater, P/R Heater, Temperature Sensor Assembly change of the Fuser Exit Actuator.
and others. • The H/R Finger prevents paper from being rolled into the
Heat Roll.
• The Heat Roll is a cylindrical metal roll with a rubber layer on
the surface. It applies heat to the paper to fuse the toner onto • The P/R Finger prevents paper from being rolled into the
the paper. Pressure Roll.
• The Pressure Roll is a cylindrical metal roll with the rubber
layer on the surface. It applies heat and pressure on the
paper to fuse the toner on the paper.
• The H/R Heater is a halogen lamp in which heating coils have
been sealed. (The heating coils provide the heat source for
the Heat Roll.) The H/R Heater is installed inside the Heat
Roll and heats the Heat Roll to the fusing temperature.
• The P/R Heater is a halogen lamp in which heating coils have
been sealed. (The heating coils provide the heat source for
the Pressure Roll.) The P/R Heater is installed inside the
Pressure Roll and heats the Pressure Roll to the fusing tem-
perature.
• The Temperature Sensor Assembly is a thermistor sensor. It
always touches the Heat Roll and detects the temperature on
the Heat Roll’s surface. (A thermistor is an element that
changes its resistance by temperature.) From the detected
temperature, the Temperature Sensor Assembly controls the
ON/OFF of the H/R Heater and P/R Heater and prevents
overheating (primary overheating prevention mechanism).
• The Thermostat is connected (in series) to the power supply
circuits of the H/R Heater and P/R Heater. If the primary over-
heating prevention mechanism of the Temperature Sensor
2.5.11 Fusing-II appear on the paper. The Oil Roll needs to touch the Heat
Roll only during the fusing operation; at other times, the Oil
1. Fuser Assembly Roll must remain separated from the Heat Roll.
The Fuser Assembly fuses the toner on the paper with heat and The Oil Cam Solenoid transfers the driving force from the P/H
pressure and transfers the paper to and from the Fuser Assembly. Main Assembly, via the P/H Drive Assembly, to the Oil Cam
Assembly, and controls the advance/retract operations of the
The Fuser Assembly consists of the Main Fuser Assembly and Oil Roll Assembly. (Advance: The Oil Roll of the Oil Roll
Fuser Tray Assembly. Assembly moves forward to the Heat Roll; Retract: The Oil
Roll moves away from the Heat Roll.)
(a) Fuser Tray Assembly
• Exchange Solenoid
The Fuser Tray Assembly consists of the Fuser In Sensor, the After fusing, the paper may be ejected face up or face down.
Oil Cam Solenoid and the Exchange Solenoid. It transfers the The Exchange Solenoid switches the Exchange Chute and
paper to and from the Main Fuser Assembly. controls the paper ejection modes.
• Fuser In Sensor • Exit-1 Roll Assembly
The Fuser In Sensor detects a paper pass status from the The Exit-1 Roll Assembly transfers the fused paper from the
position change of the Fuser In Actuator. (It detects the paper Fuser Main Assembly.
tip based on the detection timing of the Fuser Exit Sensor.)
• Fuser Chute Fan 2. Oil Roll Assembly
The Fuser Chute Fan pulls down the paper to the Fuser The Oil Roll Assembly has an Oil Roll in which Fuser Oil has been
Paper Guide and the Horizontal Chute. This is necessary to impregnated. The Oil Roll in the Oil Roll Assembly follows the Heat
position the paper correctly so that the paper is properly Roll rotation and applies the Fuser Oil evenly onto the Heat Roll
transferred to the Fuser Main Assembly. surface. The Fuser Oil prevents the following:
• Cleaner Cam Solenoid
The Cleaner Blade in the Belt Cleaner Assembly needs to • Paper from being rolled into the Heat Roll.
touch the IBT Belt Assembly only immediately after the 2nd • Heat Roll wear caused by contact with the Temperature Sen-
toner transfer. It must not touch the belt at any other time. (If sor Assembly and the H/R Fingers.
the Cleaning Blade is touching the IBT Belt Assembly while
the toner image is being formed on the IBT Belt Assembly,
the toner image is damaged.)
The Cleaner Cam Solenoid transfers the driving force from
the P/H Main Assembly, via the P/H Drive Assembly, to the
Cleaner Cam Assembly and the Cleaner Cam Guide, and
controls the advance/retract operation of the Belt Cleaner
Assembly. (Advance: The Cleaning Blade moves forward to
the IBT Belt Assembly; Retract: The Cleaning Blade moves
away from the IBT Belt Assembly.)
• Oil Cam Solenoid
If the Oil Roll in the Oil Roll Assembly is constantly touching
the Heat Roll, the Fuser Oil may degrade and oil stains may
4. Fuser Fan
The Fuser Fan exhausts the heat from the Fuser Assembly to
prevent overheating in the printer.
The following shows the transition paths among the modes. Figure 2-40. Transition Paths among the Modes
2.7 Controls
F F B R r a oO c n N k t T BB aA c C k K
N o t c h e s
R E A R O H P S E N S O R
W h it e B a n d
F R O N T O H P S E N S O R S R N A 8 5 F A
S R N A 8 6 F
NOTE: The Scanner Motor rotates when the PMSTT (Printing/Status Control) is
executed in any mode.
2.7.5.3 Toner Density Control (ADC) When detecting low toner, the system rotates the Dispense Motor
(Dispense Motor Assembly) (driving the Auger in the Developer
To obtain stable print quality, it is necessary to maintain constant toner Assembly) for the calculated duration (dispense time) to supply toner to
density in the developer. (The toner density must be detected correctly the Developer Assembly from the Toner Cartridge. If too much toner
in the actual developer without being affected by the laser.) The ADC (toner density in the developer is too high) is detected, the system forms
(Auto Density Control) forms BIAS development bands (for each color: numbers of BIAS development bands to consume the toner until the
YMCBk) on the drum and measures the density of the bands with the right toner density is detected.
ADC Sensor. (The BIAS development bands are formed with the
standard BCR voltage and development voltage and are different from NOTE: The BIAS development bands are images developed on the
the printing voltages.) BCR charged area that has negatively charged toner. This is
done by raising the BCR voltage higher than the development
voltage.
The printer indicates the corresponding message on the LCD panel and
stops printing.
When the Drum Cartridge is replaced with a new and the printer is on,
the printer generates the following image on the furface of the PPC
drum so that the Cleaning Blade does not rotate in the reverse direction.
Since the image is not transferred (1st), the toner adheres to the
Cleaning Blade. (The toner acts as a lubricant.) This prevents Cleaning
Blade from rotating in reverse.
Image generated when the Drum Cartridge is replaced
The following image is generated several times (the number of
generations has been predefined/Nominal: 5 times) in three colors
(Yellow, Magenta and Cyan).
2.7.6.3 Drum Cartridge End of Life Detection 2.7.6.4 Waste Toner Box Full Detection
1. End of life detection When the Waste toner box is almost full, the waste toner sensor detects
The life of the Drum Cartridge is determined by the number of Drum the status (Signal: High) and the message “Waste T Box Nearfull” is
rotations. By accumulating the belt rotation counts (this data is sent indicated on the LCD panel. The printer continues to perform the
from the TRO sensor), the Drum Cartridge life is detected. specified printing (toner dispense time*1) and stops printing when the
The conditions for Drum Cartridge life are defined in the following message “Replace Waste T Box” appears on the LCD panel. The
table: counter is reset when a new waste toner box is installed.
Table 2-6. Conditions for Drum Cartridge Life
*1: See the table below for the reference values which show how many
Drum Cartridge end of life warning
100,100 counts (standard) pages can be printed until “Replace Waste T Box” is displayed.
(“Warning Photocondctr”)
Drum Cartridge life - exceeded
110,000 counts (standard)
(“Replace Photocondctr”) Table 2-7. Available Print Pages
Page Length
Print Mode
NOTE:The above counts are incremented by 2 and accumulated 215.9 mm or less More than 215.9 mm
every time the TRO signal is generated while the Process Monochrome 1250 or less 625 or less
Motor Assembly is in operation. (The drum rotates twice for Color 312 or less 156 or less
one belt rotation.)
The Home Position is the location where the Rotary Frame Assembly
has been rotated 46° after the Rotary Sensor detected the protruding
section of the Rotary Frame Assembly.
Y e s N o
Reflection: Toner Cartridge has been installed.
"T o n e r L o w "
No reflection: Toner Cartridge has not been installed.
D is p e n s e tim e ( a c c u m u la te d )
N o to n e r: R e s e t o f th e c o lo r = P r e d e te r m in e d tim e A
( C le a r D is p e n s e tim e
( a c c u m u la te d ) o f th e c o lo r )
N o to n e r: R e s e t
"T o n e r L o w "
S R N A 9 1 F A
S T A R T
T o n e r C a r tr id g e : N e w /O ld d e te c tio n
N e w O ld
T o n e r life w a r n in g : R e s e t T o n e r life w a r n in g
( C le a r D is p e n s e tim e ) ] ("T o n e r L o w ")
( a c c u m u la te d ) o f th e c o lo r ) ( D is p e n s e tim e o f th e c o lo r : n o c h a n g e )
S R N A 9 3 F A
A d ju s t th e 1 s t tr a n fe r c u r r e n t a c c o r d in g to th e D r u m u s a g e .
N o te : T h e D ru m s u r fa c e c h a r a c te r is tic s c h a n g e s a c c o r d in g to u s e .
D e te r m in e th e 1 s t tr a n s fe r to u s e in p r in tin g .
A d ju s t th e 2 n d tr a n s fe r c u r r e n t a c c o r d in g to th e 1 s t tr a n s fe r v o lta g e .
D e te r m in e th e 2 n d tr a n s fe r v o lta g e to b e u s e d fo r p r in tin g .
R e tr a c t th e 2 n d B T R A s s e m b ly a n d th e B e lt C le a n e r A s s e m b ly .
2. 2nd BTR Advance/Retract control NOTE:If there is not sufficient time from when the BTR Cam
Solenoid is turned on from its off state—because there is not
In a 2nd transfer, the 2nd BTR must be in the Advance position.
enough time between the bottom edge of the previous image
(Otherwise it must be in the Retracted position.) The 2nd BTR
and the top edge of the next image (for example, the time
Advance/Retract is controlled by the BTR Cam Solenoid.
between the 1st print in the LETTER [LEF] (1 side of the belt)
NOTE:To advance the 2nd BTR, the system continuously turns on in the 2-UP mode and the 2nd print)— the BTR Cam
the BTR Cam Solenoid. To retract the 2nd BTR, the system Solenoid stays ON and the HVPS continues to supply power
continuously turns off the BTR Cam Solenoid. (The mode is to the Contact Roll.
changed by the P/H Motor Assembly rotation.) NOTE:The time required for the 2nd BTR advance operation is 1.2
seconds (standard speed mode) and 2.4 seconds (half-
BTR cam solenoid On/Off timing is as shown in the table below:
speed mode) since the 2nd BTR receives the BTR Cam
Table 2-11. 2nd BTR Advance/Retract Control Solenoid ON signal. The time required for the 2nd BTR
Standard speed mode retract operation is 1 second (standard speed mode) and 2
Comes ON E1 second before the top edge of the seconds (half-speed mode) since the 2nd BTR receives the
ON timing
image (printed area) passes the 2nd transfer position.
BTR Cam OFF signal.
Comes ON E3 seconds before the top edge of the
Normal state
image (printed area) passes the 2nd transfer position.
3. 2nd BTR Assembly end of life detection
OFF In case the rear edge of the image (printed area)
timing Abnormal
passes the 2nd transfer position after the rear edge of (a) End of life detection
the paper, the solenoid comes OFF E3 seconds before
state
the rear edge of the paper passes the 2nd transfer The life expectancy of the 2nd BTR Assembly is determined by
position. the number of printings (number of 2nd BTR transfer rotations).
Half speed mode By accumulating the 2nd BTR rotation counts, the life
Comes ON E2 second before the top edge of the expectancy of the 2nd BTR Assembly (2nd BTR) is determined.
ON timing
image (printed area) passes the 2nd transfer position.
The conditions for 2nd BTR end of life detection is defined in the
Comes ON E4 seconds before the top edge of the
Normal state following table (See the next page):
image (printed area) passes the 2nd transfer position.
Discharging is to neutralize/remove the charge on paper after 2nd n Residual toner from the 2nd transfer.
transfer. It is done by applying high voltage from the HVPS to the n Residual toner from the Cin50% patch and BIAS development
Detach Saw in the “2nd BTR Assembly. bands.
n Untransferred toner on the belt because of a paper jam.
2.7.8.4 Belt Cleaning
1. Belt Cleaning types
The belt surface must be clean for an image to be formed. The belt
There are three types of belt cleaning
surface is cleaned by the Belt Cleaner Assembly. The Belt Cleaner
Assembly needs to advance to the belt surface to clean it. The Belt (a) Normal cleaning
Cleaner Assembly Advance/Retract is controlled by the Cleaner Cam
The Belt is cleaned during a normal print operation. The
Solenoid.
maximum printable area (18 inches in the process direction) is
NOTE: To advance the Belt Cleaner Assembly, the system continuously cleaned.
turns on the Cleaner Cam Solenoid. To retract the Belt Cleaner
(b) Irregular cleaning
Assembly, the system continuously turns off the Cleaner Cam
Solenoid. (The mode is changed by the P/H Motor Assembly An irregular cleaning is done when the Warm-up mode is started
rotation.) (except recovering from an image generation error) after a
NOTE: If there is not sufficient time from when the Cleaner Cam Cin50% patch or BIAS development bands have been
Solenoid is turned on from its off state—because there is not generated. One circumference of the belt is cleaned.
enough time between the bottom edge of the previous image (c) Error cleaning
and the top edge of the next image (for example, in a continuous
printing in the standard speed mode or B/W mode)—the Cleaner When the system is recovering from an image generation error,
Cam Solenoid stays ON and the Belt Cleaner Assembly toner may be on the belt; the belt is cleaned when the Warm-up
continue to be in the advanced position. mode is started. One circumference of the belt is cleaned.
NOTE: The time required for the Belt Cleaner Assembly advance
operation is 1.0 seconds (standard speed mode) and 2.1
seconds (half-speed mode) since the Belt Cleaner Assembly
receives the Cleaner Cam Solenoid ON signal. The time
required for the Belt Cleaner Assembly retract operation is 0.9
seconds (standard speed mode) and 1.8 seconds (half-speed
mode) since the Belt Cleaner receives the Cleaner Cam
Solenoid OFF signal.
3. Belt Cleaner Assembly end of life detection (b) Processes after replacement
(a) End of life detection
C A U T IO N Do the following operations after you replace the
The life of the Belt Cleaner Assembly is determined by the Belt Cleaner Assembly with a new one. Doing any of
number of printings (number of belt cleanings). By accumulating these operations before replacing the Belt Cleaner
cleaning counts, the life of the Belt Cleaning Assembly Assembly may result in damage to the system or
(Cleaning Blade) life is determined. The conditions for Belt cause the system to malfunction.
Cleaner Assembly end of life detection is as defined in the
following table:
• Life expectancy exceeded
After replacing the 2nd Belt Cleaner Assembly with a new
Table 2-16. IBT Cleaner End Of Life Detection one, perform “IBT Cleaner Reset” in the maintenance menu.
Belt Cleaner Assembly end of life warning • End of life warning
98,000 counts (standard) After replacing the 2nd Belt Cleaner Assembly with a new
(Maintenance-call error xxxx)
Belt Cleaner Assembly life - exceeded one, perform “IBT Cleaner Reset” in the maintenance menu.
100,000 counts (standard)
(Service-call error: E0023)
NOTE:
The count described above is based on the following:
1 count:
- Each print of the two prints on one belt surface (2-UP mode)
2 counts:
- One print in 1-UP mode,
- One print on one belt surface (2-UP mode).
Table 2-17. 1-UP/2-UP Control Yellow (1st sheet) → Yellow (2nd sheet) → Magenta (1st sheet) →
Image for 1 Belt Magenta (2nd sheet) → Cyan (1st sheet) → Cyan (2nd sheet) →
Mode Paper size
Circumference Black (1st sheet) → Black (2nd sheet)
1-UP 1 print All paper sizes
2-UP 2 prints A4 (LEF)/LETTER (LEF) or smaller
1. 1-UP mode
One sheet is transported the distance equivalent to one belt
circumference. The image (toner image) is formed in the following
color sequence: Yellow, Magenta, Cyan and Black.
detected temperature in the Temperature Sensor Assembly) Less than [0.1t+b]°C Warm-up ends after 30 seconds from when
[Standard the Heat Roll surface temperature becomes
temperature: H] °C [0.1t+b]°C (after Power ON) and the Fuser
control temperature becomes [Temp.1]°C.
t: Fuser temperature at Power On
b: Compensation (Defined in NVM on the
MCU PWB.)
2.7.10.3 Mode Control: READY, LIGHT SLEEP, DEEP SLEEP 2.7.10.4 Printing Mode Control
The ON/OFF controls for the H/R Heater and P/R Heater are defined as The Fuser control temperature for the Printing mode has been
follows: determined by the paper type (regular paper, OHP, etc.), color mode
(YMCBk mode/BW mode), environment temperature (detected by the
Table 2-19. Mode Control Environment Sensor) and the number of continuous printings. The H/R
Heater and P/R Heater are turned ON/OFF as determined by the Fuser
Mode Heater ON/OFF control
control temperature.
READY • If the Fuser temperature is lower than the Fuser control
temperature (Temp 1), then Heater On. NOTE: Before and after the Printing mode is enabled, a compulsive
• If the Fuser temperature is the Fuser control temperature
heater ON/OFF is executed.
(Temp 1) or higher, then Heater OFF.
LIGHT SLEEP • If the Fuser temperature is lower than the Fuser control
temperature (Temp.0) in the Light Sleep mode, then 2.7.10.5 Not Ready State Detection During Printing
Heater ON.
• If the Fuser temperature is Fuser control temperature A Not Ready state is generated to maintain constant and correct print
(Temp.0) or higher in the Light Sleep mode, then Heater quality. When a Not Ready state is detected, the system halts the print
OFF.
job.
DEEP SLEEP Always Heater OFF.
1. A Not Ready state occurs during printing if the following occurs
The Oil Rate Counter detects an end of life warning or No Fuser (When the Oil Cam Assembly rotates, the Oil Cam Assembly pin
Oil. The counter detects the following:↑ cuts the metal foil. This action activates the PV Counter and Oil
Rate Counter.)
3. Oil Roll Assembly detection 4. Main Fuser Assembly end of life detection
The CRU Switch Assembly detects the Oil Roll Assembly. Metal foil
has been attached to the Oil Roll Assembly. The CRU Switch (a) End of life detection
Assembly checks the conductivity of the foil. The life of the Main Fuser Assembly is determined by the print
image density being fused. Life expectancy is determined from
Conductive: Oil Roll Assembly has been installed the accumulated dispense time and the number of images
Not conductive: Oil Roll Assembly has not been installed (image count) being fused. If either reaches a predetermined
value, an end of life warning or a life exceeded error is detected.
(b) Dispense time
The dispense time is the accumulated hours that the Dispense
Motor has been in use. This data can be used to calculate toner
consumption (PDCD or ADC). The conditions for the Main Fuser
Assembly end of life detection are defined in the following table:
The printer is equipped with the data bus 64-bit RISC CPU “R4700-
133MHz” for the processor and a168-pin SDRAM module
(CLK:66MHz), which is becoming a major module used for desk top
personal computer, for memory. Combining those equippements, the
printer has secceeded in processing data on the C235MAIN board at a
higher speed.
Specific to color print, one page of data processed is more than 4 times
as large as in monochrome print. Since the data to process is so heavy,
the printer has a high-speed image procossor ASIC on the C235MAIN
board for a faster color image data processing. With this ASIC
equipped, the conputer side is less loaded in processing data, and the
CPU on the C235MAIN board also processes color image data with a
less load. (The 2UP mode equipped with the printer allows the engine to
run 2 pages (A4/LETTER) at a time.)
See Figure 2-54 for the C235MAIN board circuit diagram and Table
2-25 and Table 2-26 for the major components on the C235MAIN board
and their functions.
2 5 6
Table 2-25. C235MAIN Board Major Components Table 2-26. C235MAIN Board Major Components (Continued)
Componant name Location Function Componant name Location Function
The RISC*-type CPU, which operates at 133 MHz The 4K-bit EEPROM, which stores the
RISC-CPU 93C86 IC15
IC1 (internal) and 3.3V. (External: 66.66 MHz)
R4700-133 printer setting infomation.
*RISC: Reduced Instruction Set Computer
41.1699C CR1 41.1699 MHz (→ E05B53, E05B28)
Controls memory areas (SDRAM, Code-DIMM,
66.6666 MHz (→ CPU, SDRAM, E05B51,
E05B51 (ASIC) IC2 IPL/FONT ROM, Option ROM DIMM) 66.6666C CR2
E05B53)
Performs DMA.
ACT1284 IC18/19/21 Bus driver for the IEEE1284ECP
Contains the following functions:
NDB6020 QF1 FET driven at 3.3 VDC
• CPGI (Color Photo & Graphics Improvement)
E05B53 IC23 M51953B IC3 Reset IC
• Controls video signals
• I/F for the engine controller board (MCU PWB) LM3411 IC28 3.3-VDC regulator
Contains the following functions: CGS74C IC29 Manages separation of the 66.66-MHz clock
• Controls the IEEE1284 Parallel B Socket P. A DIMM with a 2M-bit FLASH ROM
Code DIMM CN3
E05B40 IC17 • Controls the EEPROM (IC15) equipped.
• Controls the I/O of the control panel • Slot 0/1/2 (Standard: 32M-bit DIMM is installed
in the slot 0.)
• Controls the Type-B (1st channel)
• Slot 0: A DIMM with a capacity of 64MB or
Contains the following functions:
more must be set in this slot.
E05B52 IC14 • Interface for E05B51 and E05B40 SDRAM DIMM CN7/8/9
• Slot 1/2: A DIMM with a capacity of 32/64/
• Controls the Type-B (2nd channel) 128MB must be set in this slot.
Contains the following functions: • The maximum memory capacity acceptance
• PGI (Photo & Graphics Improvement) for the C235MAIN board is 256MB.
• RIT (Resolution Improvement Technology)
E05B28 IC26
• I/F (Video I/F) for the Engine controller board
(MCU PWB)
• Manages ON/OFF of the CONTROLLER FAN
E05B54 IC22 CCNV (Color CoNVersion) ASIC (RGB→ CMYK)
Contains the following functions:
• IPL and FONT (Upper 16-Bit data / Lower 16-
Bit data)
M80C25/26 IC8/9
• Has two mask ROMs (size: 512K bit x 16 bit
(1MB) ) to store the control program and font
data.
AD9561 IC25 8-bit PWM controller
The S-RAM (1M-bit), which is used as the high-
TC55V1325FF IC24
speed working RAM for Bit-bild in the E05B53.
3
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY/ADJUSTMENT
EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B
Contents
OVERVIEW .................................................................................................... 1 Multi Sheet Inserter ................................................................................. 27
Precautions for disassembly, assembly and adjustment........................... 1 MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY Removal (PL4.1.10) ..................................... 27
Tools.......................................................................................................... 2 MSI ASSEMBLY Removal (PL4.1.1) .................................................. 28
Items to check after assembly................................................................... 2 MSI FRONT COVER Removal (PL4.1.3) ........................................... 29
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES .............................................. 3 MSI REAR COVER Removal (PL4.1.4) ............................................. 29
Exterior View and Part Names .................................................................. 4 MSI TOP COVER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL4.2.4) ........................... 30
Removing/Replacing the Consumables .................................................... 5 MSI EDGE SENSOR Removal (PL4.2.6) ........................................... 31
Updating the Program ROM...................................................................... 5 MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR Removal (PL4.2.7) ................................. 31
Updating the ROM using a standard parallel interface ......................... 6 PICK UP ROLL Removal (PL4.2.11) .................................................. 32
Updating by copying from the FLASH ROM module ............................ 7 RETARD PAD ASSEMBLY Removal (PL4.3.3) ................................. 33
Formatting the FLASH ROM Module .................................................... 8 PICK UP SOLENOID Removal (PL4.2.21) ........................................ 34
Formatting the FLASH ROM Module .................................................... 9 MSI CLUTCH Removal (PL4.2.26) .................................................... 35
Cover....................................................................................................... 10 MSI ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL4.2.9) ....................................... 36
FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL1.1.1) .............................. 10 MSI BOTTOM ASSEMBLY Removal (PL4.3.9) ................................. 37
FRONT LOWER COVER Removal (PL1.1.5) .................................... 10 MSI LONG N/P SENSOR Removal (PL4.3.16) .................................. 38
TOP COVER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL1.1.20) ................................. 11 Paper Transportation .............................................................................. 39
INNER COVER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL1.1.10) ............................. 12 MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY Removal (PL5.1.1) ........................................ 39
REAR COVER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL1.1.30) .............................. 13 PRE-REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL5.1.5) ........................ 40
FILTER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL1.1.32) .......................................... 14 P/H TURN CHUTE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL5.1.4) .......................... 41
LEFT LOWER COVER Removal (PL1.1.40) ...................................... 14 REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL5.1.6) ................................. 42
RIGHT COVER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL1.1.50) ............................. 15 PRE-REGI. CLUTCH Removal (PL5.2.8) .......................................... 43
OPERATION PANEL Removal (PL1.1.60) ......................................... 15 PRE-REGI. ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL5.2.4) ........................... 44
Paper Tray............................................................................................... 16 REGI. CLUTCH Removal (PL5.2.15) ................................................. 45
UNIVERSAL TRAY Removal (PL2.1.1) .............................................. 16 REGI. BRAKE CLUTCH Removal (PL5.2.20) .................................... 46
FRONT SNUBBER Removal (PL2.2.9) .............................................. 16 REGI. METAL ROLL Removal (PL5.2.16) ......................................... 47
END GUIDE (PL2.2.16), SECTOR GEAR (PL2.2.17) Removal ......... 17 REGI. RUBBER ROLL Removal (PL5.2.24) ...................................... 48
Paper Feeder .......................................................................................... 19 REGI. SENSOR Removal (PL5.2.28) ................................................ 49
TURN IN CHUTE Removal (PL3.1.18) ............................................... 19 FRONT OHP SENSOR Removal (PL5.2.31) ..................................... 50
TURN ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL3.1.11) .................................. 20 REAR OHP SENSOR Removal (PL5.2.32) ....................................... 51
FEED ROLL Removal (PL3.1.3) ........................................................ 21 Xerographics ........................................................................................... 52
FEED SOLENOID Removal (PL3.1.9) ............................................... 22 DRUM CARTRIDGE Removal (PL6.1.10) ......................................... 52
FEED ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL3.1.1) .................................... 23 WASTE TONER BOX Removal (PL6.1.12) ....................................... 52
SIZE SWITCH ASSEMBLY Removal (PL3.1.9) ................................. 24 ROS ASSEMBLY Removal (PL6.1.1) ................................................ 53
TRAY N/P SENSOR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL3.1.30) ..................... 25 ADC SENSOR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL6.1.20) .............................. 54
LOW PAPER SENSOR Removal (PL3.1.35) ..................................... 26 XL RAIL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL6.1.40) ......................................... 55
TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR Removal (PL3.1.32) ............................. 26 WASTE TONER SENSOR Removal (PL6.1.42) ................................ 56
EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B
TONER BOX SENSOR Removal (PL6.1.43) ..................................... 56 CRU SWITCH ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.3.25) ............................... 95
ERASE LAMP ASSEMBLY Removal (PL6.1.30) ............................... 57 FUSER IN SENSOR Removal (PL9.4.4) ........................................... 96
Development ........................................................................................... 58 FUSER CHUTE FAN Removal (PL9.4.10) ......................................... 97
Toner Cartridge Removal (PL7.1.1 ~ PL7.1.4) ................................... 58 Paper Exit................................................................................................ 98
Developer Assembly Removal EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY Removal (PL10.1.10) ................................. 98
(PL7.1.10, PL7.1.20, PL7.1.30, PL7.1.40) ...................................... 59 EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL10.1.2) ................................. 98
Developer Removal (PL7.1.13, PL7.1.23, PL7.1.33, PL7.1.43) ......... 60 EXIT LOWER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL10.1.1) ................................ 99
ROTARY SENSOR Removal (PL7.2.22) ........................................... 61 EXIT-2 ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL10.2.5) ................................ 99
ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY Removal (PL7.2.2) ............................ 62 EXIT-3 ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL10.2.7) .............................. 100
CARTRIDGE SENSOR Removal (PL7.2.26) ..................................... 64 FUSER FAN Removal (PL10.2.15) .................................................. 100
USED CART. SENSOR Removal (PL7.2.30) ..................................... 65 TOP EXIT SENSOR Removal (PL10.2.12) ...................................... 101
IBT........................................................................................................... 66 EXIT CHUTE SWITCH Removal (PL10.2.13) .................................. 101
TENSION LEVER Removal (PL8.1.4) ................................................ 66 Drive ...................................................................................................... 102
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL8.1.3) ..................................... 67 P/H DRIVE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.1) .................................. 102
BTR CAM SOLENOID Removal (PL8.1.15) ....................................... 69 P/H MOTOR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.3) ................................ 103
BELT CLEANER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL8.1.30) ........................... 70 ROTARY MOTOR PWB Removal (PL11.1.21) ................................ 103
2ND BTR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL8.1.20) ....................................... 71 ROTARY MOTOR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.20) .................... 104
2ND BTR CAM ASSEMBLY Removal (PL8.1.10) .............................. 72 DISPENSE MOTOR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.22) ................. 105
AUGER HIGH ASSEMBLY Removal (PL8.1.40) ............................... 73 FUSER DRIVE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.2) ............................ 106
IBT BELT ASSEMBLY Removal (PL8.2.2) ......................................... 75 PROCESS MOTOR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.12 ................... 107
TRO SENSOR Removal (PL8.2.12) ................................................... 77 PROCESS DRIVE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.10) .................... 108
Fusing...................................................................................................... 78 DEVE. CLUTCH ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.23) ........................ 109
OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.1.10) ...................................... 78 Frame .................................................................................................... 110
FUSER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.1.1) ............................................ 78 DEVE. TIE PLATE Removal (PL12.1.4) ........................................... 110
MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.1.2) .................................. 79 Electrical................................................................................................ 111
FUSER UPPER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.2.23) ............................. 80 LVPS Removal (PL13.1.1) ............................................................... 111
H/R HEATER Removal (PL9.2.20) ..................................................... 81 HVPS Removal (PL13.1.2) ............................................................... 112
P/R HEATER Removal (PL9.2.19) ..................................................... 82 TOP COVER SWITCH Removal (PL13.1.3) .................................... 112
LOWER GUIDE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.2.26) ............................. 83 DEVE. FAN Removal (PL13.1.5) ..................................................... 113
FUSER EXIT SENSOR Removal (PL9.2.25) ..................................... 84 MCU PWB Removal (PL13.2.1) ....................................................... 114
UPPER GUIDE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.2.32) ............................. 84 COMMUNICATION ASSEMBLY Removal (PL13.2.2) ..................... 115
HEAT ROLL Removal (PL9.2.12) ...................................................... 85 FRONT COVER SWITCH R Removal (PL13.2.3) ........................... 116
PRESSURE ROLL Removal (PL9.2.9) .............................................. 86 FRONT COVER SWITCH L Removal (PL13.2.4) ............................ 117
TEMP. SENSOR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.2.24) ........................... 87 ENVIRONMENT SENSOR Removal (PL13.2.5) .............................. 118
EXCHANGE CHUTE Removal (PL9.3.10) ......................................... 88 Controller............................................................................................... 119
OIL CAM SOLENOID Removal (PL9.3.21) ........................................ 89 CONTROLLER FAN Removal (PL 14.1.2) ....................................... 120
EXCHANGE SOLENOID Removal (PL9.3.16) ................................... 90 CONT. CHASSIS ASSEMBLY Removal (PL 14.1.1) ....................... 120
OIL CAM ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.3.22) ....................................... 91 ADJUSTMENT ........................................................................................... 121
CLEANER CAM SOLENOID Removal (PL9.4.23) ............................. 92 NIP Pressure Adjustment of the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY ................ 121
CLEANER CAM ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.4.26) ............................ 93 Deve. Spacer Selection......................................................................... 123
EXIT-1 ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.3.7) ................................... 94
EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B
3.1 Overview
This chapter describes procedures for disassembly, assembly, and C A U T IO N n When servicing, avoid handling any parts forcibly.
adjustment of the EPL-C8000. Note the procedures are applicable only Doing so might damage the parts and cause printer
when the printer has no options installed. For information on removing/ malfunction.
installing the options, please see the EPL-C8000 Setup Guide. n Various types of screws are used to assemble the
printer, and wrong usage might crush tapped hole and
3.1.1 Precautions for disassembly, assembly and cause troubles. Therefore, be sure to mount the right
adjustment screws to the specified positions.
3.2 Disassembly/Assembly Procedures Refer to the followings which explain descriptions used in this chapter.
o Regarding “(PL X, Y, Z)” at the end of each heading of removal
This section describes procedures for disassembling/assembling the sections, it corresponds to the numbers in the part list in
printer. Unless otherwise specified, assembly can be performed by Appendix. Referring to the numbers, you can find the
reversing the disassembly procedure. Refer to Section 3.3 for appearance and location of the parts efficiently.
adjustment procedure. In principle, you are to remove all options before
servicing. However, you can leave them if possible. o Directions are described as mentioned below.
(See Figure 3-1.)
C A U T IO N
n Front: Front side viewing the printer toward its front side
Some parts are listed as spare parts but not mentioned
n Back: Rear side viewing the printer toward its front side
in disassembly/assembly procedure. Therefore, look
n Left: Left hand side viewing the printer toward its front side
carefully how they are installed before you removing
n Right: Right hand side viewing the printer toward its front
them.
side
o Screws are mentioned with descriptions including “(mounting
NOTE: Directions used in this section are defined as shown in the figure location, color, feature, thread part length, and so on)”.
below: o “Z)” in a drawing corresponds to the step “Z” of the section.
o Fasten the screws in the drawings using a Philips screw driver
if no instruction is given.
R e a r o If black arrows are shown with numbers, they show the order to
act for the step.
o White arrows (FRONT) in the drawings show the front side of
the printer.
o Refer to Appendix for the connector (P/J) locations and
L e ft harness routings.
o The generic term “Developer Assembly” is used for
“DEVELOPPER ASSEMBLY Y”, “DEVELOPER ASSEMBLY
M”, “DEVELOPER ASSEMBLY C”, AND “DEVELOPER
R ig h t ASSEMBLY K”.
o The generic term “TONER CARTRIDGE” is used for “TONER
F ro n t CARTRIDGE Y”, “TONER CARTRIDGE M”, “TONER
CARTRIDGE C”, and “TONER CARTRIDGE K”.
(6)
(1) (6)
(3) (7)
(2) (8)
(7)
(9)
(8)
(3)
(9)
(1) - (Parallel interface connector) (6) FUSER ASSEMBLY (Fuser Unit)
(10)
(4) (2) - (Connector cover) (7) - (Power Switch)
(3) - (Right ventilation grill) (8) EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY
(11) (Face-up Tray)
(5)
(4) FILTER ASSEMBLY (-) (9) - (AC Inlet)
(5) EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY
(Eject Cover)
(1) TOP COVER (Face-down tray) (7) - (Top ventilation grill) Figure 3-3. Printer viewed from the rear left
(2) PANEL UNIT (Control Panel) (8) RIGHT COVER ASSEMBLY
(Right Side Cover))
(3) FRONT COVER (Front Cover) (9) MSI ASSEMBLY (MP Tray)
(4) - (Front ventilation grill) (10) MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY (Expansion Tray)
(5) UNIVERSAL TRAY (11) MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY (Paper Path Unit)
(Paper Cassette)
(6) STOPPER COVER (Stopper)
(3) The program ROM of this printer is a flash ROM module and can be
updated in one of the following 2 ways:
(1) 1. Transferring the ROM updating program data (*.RCC) from the host
(4)
computer via the standard parallel interface.
(5)
(2) 2. Copying the program ROM from the flash ROM module which has
the most updated program.
Also, when you failed to write the program into the flash ROM and
perform the same writing operation again or when you copy the
program from the flash ROM module to another flash ROM module. you
need to perform:
(1) MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY (Fuser) (4) WASTE TONER BOX
(Waste Toner Collector)
3. Formatting Flash ROM module
(2) OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY (5) TONER CARTRIDGE
(Fuser Oil Roll) (Toner Cartridge)
See the following sections for the procedures of each operation.
(3) DRUM CARTRIDGE
(Photoconductor Unit)
3.2.3.1 Updating the ROM using a standard parallel interface 5. To transfer the program data file from the computer to the printer,
type the command (shown below) on the DOS prompt (from the
Follow the instruction below to update the program ROM using a directory that has “*.RCC”) and press Enter key.
standard parallel interface.
COPY /B file name.RCC PRN:
Preparation
NOTE: This method is used to update a *.rcc file. In case of updating a 6. Check the printer message on the LCD panel changes as follows:
*.crb file, refer to Section 1.5.5. “Writing DIMM P” → “Reset “→ “Ready”
Copy the data file (program ROM source file: “file name. RCC”) in (Takes about 10 minutes to complete.)
the route directory (HDD).
7. When the message is “Ready”, the program has been downloaded
NOTE:The personal computer to be used should be able to send and turn the printer off.
binary data from DOS prompt via a parallel interface.
8. Turn the printer back on and print a status sheet, and check that the
Procedure
program has been updated by comparing the Firmware Revision
1. Print a status sheet. No. with the one in the status sheet printed in Step 1. (The version is
shown in the left side of the column.)
2. Turn off the printer and the personal computer, and connect a
interface to each of them. Make sure to disconnect all interface
cables but the parallel interface cable so the printer will not receive
data from any other interfaces.
3. Turn on the printer then the personal computer, and the printer
starts initializing and warm-up is completed within 5 minutes.
If the OS is Windows95, follow the steps below:
1. Click “Start”, then choose “Shut Down”.
2. In the Shut Down Window, select “Reset the computer in MS
-DOS mode?” to reset the computer.
3. MS-DOS starts up. (Follow the steps below.)
3.2.3.2 Updating by copying from the FLASH ROM module 5. When the program has been properly updated, the printer enters the
Ready status. If an error occurs, one of the following messages
Follow the steps below. appears.
1. Insert the ROM module which has the program ROM source to the DIMM COPY B>A ERROR
socket B of the CONTROLLER PWB.
NOTE:Leave the ROM module in the socket P of the FORMAT ERROR DIMM A
CONTROLLER PWB as it is.
2. Set the ROM module in which the program is to be written in the 6. Turn the printer power off and remove the ROM module from the
socket A of the CONTROLLER PWB. both sockets A and B.
NOTE:Format this ROM module in the way describe in Section 7. Replace the updated ROM module with the ROM module in the
3.2.3.3. socket P.
3. Turn the printer on while pressing the “On Line”, “Alt”, and “Enter”
buttons. (Keep the buttons down until proceeding to Step 4.) All the
LED lamps and LCD on the panel come on and the LCD indicates
the message below:
RAM CHECK**.*MB
Numeric is shown in place of **.* and starts counting up, then the
engine initialization takes place.
4. When the printer enters the program ROM copy mode, the LCD
message shown below appears.
DIMM COPY MODE
3.2.3.3 Formatting the FLASH ROM Module 4. When an error has occurred, the message bellow appears.
2. Turn the printer on while pressing down the “Alt”, “Item”, “Value”,
and “Enter” buttons, and keep the buttons down until instructed to
do so. The LCD and all the LED lamps on the control panel come on
and the message bellow appears.
Numeric is shown in place of **.* and starts counting up, then the
engine initialization takes place.
When the printer is in the ROM formatting mode, the following
messages are indicated consequently.
DIMM A ERASING
DIMM A ERASING o o o o
3. After while, the message below appears and the ROM has been
formatted.
DIMM A ERASED
3.2.3.4 Formatting the FLASH ROM Module 4. When an error has occurred, the message bellow appears.
2. Turn the printer on while pressing down the “Alt”, “Item”, “Value”,
and “Enter” buttons, and keep the buttons down until instructed to
release them. The LCD and all the LED lamps on the control panel
come on and the message bellow appears.
DIMM A ERASING
DIMM A ERASING o o o o
3. After while, the message below appears and the ROM has been
formatted.
DIMM A ERASED
3. Remove 2 screws (gold, with a washer, 8mm) securing the right and
left COVER SUPPORTs.
2. Pressing the tub at the upper edge of the O/H COVER, pull the O/H
COVER down to release the hook attaching the cover to the REAR
COVER ASSEMBLY. Then move the O/H COVER backward to
remove it.
3.2.4.6 FILTER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL1.1.32) 3.2.4.7 LEFT LOWER COVER Removal (PL1.1.40)
1. Hold the tab of the FILTER ASSEMBLY at the back and unlock it 1. Take the UNIVERSAL TRAY out.
from the REAR COVER.
2. Remove the FRONT LOWER COVER. (See Section 3.2.4.2.)
3.2.4.8 RIGHT COVER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL1.1.50) 3.2.4.9 OPERATION PANEL Removal (PL1.1.60)
1. Open the FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY. 1. Remove the TOP COVER along with the OPERATION PANEL.
(See Section 3.2.4.3.)
2. Take the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY out.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to break the hooks in the
3. Remove 2 screws (silver, cup head, 8mm) securing the RIGHT OPERATION PANEL.
COVER ASSEMBLY and open the front side of the cover. Then shift
the cover to the rear and remove it. 2. Release the hooks in the OPERATION PANEL and remove the
panel from the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY.
3)-3
3)-2
3)-1
3)-1
2. Move the END GUIDE to the right end. (= minimum paper size fits)
NOTE: After removing the FRONT GUIDE ASSEMBLY, hold the
BOTTOM PLATE ASSEMBLY down.
7. Release the joint for the hole in the SECTOR GEAR and the swivel
peg in the UNIVERSAL TRAY, and slide the SECTOR GEAR along
the groove to fit the round end of the groove to the peg in the END
GUIDE. Then remove the SECTOR GEAR.
Figure 3-16.
END GUIDE (PL2.2.16), SECTOR GEAR (PL2.2.17) Removal (1)
8. Remove 2 screws (black, cup head, 8mm) securing the LOCK PLATE
by the right edge.
9. Remove 2 screws (black, cup head, 8mm) securing the LOCK PLATE
by the left edge, and remove the LOCK PLATE.
10. Remove 2 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the REAR GUIDE
PLATE L.
NOTE: In the following step, hold the REAR GUIDE while removing
the REAR GUIDE PLATE R. so that the REAR GUIDE will
not drop.
11. Remove 1 screw (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the REAR GUIDE
PLATE R and remove the REAR GUIDE R and the REAR GUIDE.
NOTE: In the following step, TRAY N/F SPRINGS will spring out.
Therefore, be careful not to lose them.
12. Moving the PLATE LINK, unlock the BOTTOM PLATE ASSEMBLY
and open it. Then slide the END GUIDE further right and remove it.
2. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY with the MSI TRAY installed on
it.
NOTE: In the next step, be careful not to damage the hinge part of
the TURN IN CHUTE.
3. Press the hinge at the rear part of the TURN IN CHUTE to release
the peg and swivel the TURN IN CHUTE right around the front side
as the supporting point.
3.2.6.2 TURN ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL3.1.11) NOTE: In the next step, the pulley and the gear in the TURN ROLL
ASSEMBLY will dislocate. Therefore, be careful not to drop
1. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.) and lose them.
2. Remove the UNIVERSAL TRAY. (See Section 3.2.5.1.) 14. Remove the E-ring securing the TURN ARM ASSEMBLY and the
TURN ARM SUPPORT, and remove the TURN ARM ASSEMBLY.
3. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)
15. Remove the TURN GEAR, TURN GEAR PIN, and the TURN ARM
4. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY with the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY
STOPPER from the TURN ROLL ASSEMBLY.
installed on it. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)
11. Shift the TURN FRONT BEARING to the rear and remove the
bearing.
12. Shift the TURN ROLL ASSEMBLY forward to release the rear end
Figure 3-19. TURN ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal
and shift the rear part of the assembly to the right. Then, shifting the
assembly to the rear, remove it along with the TURN FRONT
BEARING, TURN REAR BEARING, and TURN ARM ASSEMBLY. C H E C K
P O IN T
When installing the TRAY STOPPER, verify that the
stopper is at the right position by moving the MSI tray in
13. Remove the TURN FRONT BEARING AND TURN REAR and out to see if the tray is securely supported.
BEARING from the TURN ROLL ASSEMBLY.
3. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY with the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY
installed on it. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)
NOTE: In the following step, be careful with the metal plate as you
maybe hurt with its sharp edge.
4. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY with the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY
installed on it. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)
6. Remove the FEED SPRING from the FEED GEAR and the frame.
7. Remove the E-ring securing the FEED GEAR and remove the
FEED GEAR.
8. Remove the screw (silver, 8mm) securing the FEED SHAFT GUIDE
and remove the FEED SHAFT GUIDE and FEED BEARING on the
front.
9. Shift the FEED ROLL ASSEMBLY forward to release the rear end
from the frame. Then move the end downward and move the FEED
ROLL ASSEMBLY backward, avoiding contact with the TRAY N/P
SENSOR ASSEMBLY, and remove it along with the FEED Figure 3-22. FEED ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal
BEARING.
C H E C K After installing the FEED ROLL ASSEMBLY, check that
P O IN T
10. Remove the E-ring and the FEED BEARING from the REED ROLL the notch of the FEED GEAR is held at the arm of the
ASSEMBLY.
FEED SOLENOID.
6. Remove the screw (black, cup head, 12mm) securing the SIZE
SWITCH ASSEMBLY and remove the SIZE SWITCH ASSEMBLY Figure 3-23. SIZE SWITCH ASSEMBLY Removal
from the SIZE SWITCH ASSEMBLY.
3. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY with the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY
installed on it. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)
5. Unhook the TRAY N/P SENSOR ASSEMBLY from the frame and
remove it.
3.2.6.8 LOW PAPER SENSOR Removal (PL3.1.35) 3.2.6.9 TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR Removal (PL3.1.32)
1. Remove the UNIVERSAL TRAY. (See Section 3.2.5.1.) 1. Remove the UNIVERSAL TRAY. (See Section 3.2.5.1.)
2. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.) 2. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)
3. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY with the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY 3. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY with the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY
installed on it. (See Section 3.2.8.1.) installed on it. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)
4. Remove TRAY N/P SENSOR ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.6.7.) 4. Remove TRAY N/P SENSOR ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.6.7.)
5. Disconnect the connector (P/J107) for the TRAY NO PAPER
5. Remove the screw (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the LOW PAPER
SENSOR and remove the harness.
SENSOR, and remove the LOW PAPER SENSOR.
6. Release the hooks securing the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR from
the TRAY N/P BRACKET and remove the TRAY NO PAPER
SENSOR.
2. Release the rear arm from the MSI FRAME, remove the MSI TRAY
ASSEMBLY.
4. Remove the screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the MSI EARTH
WIRE to the REGI. BRAKE BRACKET.
NOTE: In the next step, hold the MAIN P/H COVER ASSEMBLY
when you remove MAIN P/H COVER ASSEMBLY, or the P/
H COVER ASSEMBLY will be dislocated. (You can remove
the MAIN P/H COVER if necessary.)
3.2.7.3 MSI FRONT COVER Removal (PL4.1.3) 3.2.7.4 MSI REAR COVER Removal (PL4.1.4)
1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.) 1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)
2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.) 2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)
3. Remove the screw (silver, tapped, 14mm) securing the MSI FRONT 3. Remove the screw (silver, tapped, 14mm) securing the MSI REAR
COVER. COVER.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to break the hooks. NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to break the hooks for
the MSI REAR COVER and MSI FRAME.
4. Release 2 hooks at the top of the MSI FRONT COVER and the at
the bottom of the MSI FRAME, and remove the MSI FRONT 4. Release 2 hooks at the top of the MSI REAR COVER and the at the
COVER. bottom of the MSI FRAME and remove the MSI REAR COVER.
Figure 3-29. MSI FRONT COVER Removal Figure 3-30. MSI REAR COVER Removal
3.2.7.6 MSI EDGE SENSOR Removal (PL4.2.6) 3.2.7.7 MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR Removal (PL4.2.7)
1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.) 1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)
2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.) 2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)
3. Remove the MSI FRONT COVER. (See Section 3.2.7.3.) 3. Remove the MSI FRONT COVER. (See Section 3.2.7.3.)
4. Remove the MSI REAR COVER. (See Section 3.2.7.4.) 4. Remove the MSI REAR COVER. (See Section 3.2.7.4.)
5. Remove the MSI TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.5.) 5. Remove the MSI TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.5.)
6. Remove 2 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the MSI EDGE NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to break the hooks for
SENSOR, and remove the EDGE SENSOR. the MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR.
6. Release the hooks securing the MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR to the
MSI TOP COVER, and remove the MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR.
3. Release 2 hooks securing the front and rear FRONT CORE ROLLs
in the MSI ROLL ASSEMBLY from the groove on the PICK UP
SHAFT, and move each FRONT CORE ROLL away from the PICK
UP ROLL 20mm or more.
9. Set the pad surface of the RETARD PAD ASSEMBLY vertical, then
remove the RETARD PAD ASSEMBLY along with the RETARD
SPRING pulling them out to the right.
3.2.7.11 MSI CLUTCH Removal (PL4.2.26) 12. Remove the E-ring securing the MSI SHAFT and remove the shaft
from the MSI CLUTCH.
1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)
7. Release the hook for the PICK UP GEAR from the shaft and remove
the PICK UP GEAR from the MSI ROLL ASSEMBLY.
7. Release the pegs on the rear then front sides of the MSI BOTTOM
ASSEMBLY from the MSI FRAME, and remove the MSI BOTTOM
ASSEMBLY.
8. Remove the screw (gold, tapped, 6mm) securing the MSI EARTH
WIRE to the MSI BOTTOM PLATE.
Figure 3-39. MSI BOTTOM ASSEMBLY Removal
9. Disconnect the connectors P/J206 for MSI LONG N/P SENSOR and
release the harness from the clump. Then remove the MSI
BOTTOM ASSEMBLY. C H E C K n Be sure to route the harness properly. Otherwise, the
P O IN T
harness is slack and interferes with MSI BOTTOM
ASSEMBLY.
n Set the MSI N/F FRONT SPRING (2 in front, color:
silver) and the MSI N/F REAR SPRING (1 at the rear,
color: black) securely so they operate properly.
8. Release the MSI LONG N/P SENSOR from the hook in the MSI
BASE TRAY, and remove the MSI LONG N/P SENSOR.
3.2.8.3 P/H TURN CHUTE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL5.1.4) 6. Push the upper pegs in the P/H TURN CHUTE ASSEMBLY inward
1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.) and remove the P/H TURN CHUTE ASSEMBLY from the P/H
FRAME ASSEMBLY
2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)
5. Pulling the socket areas in the P/H FRAME ASSEMBLY where the
pegs in the P/H TURN CHUTE ASSEMBLY fit in, turn the P/H
TURN CHUTE ASSEMBLY in the direction indicated with the arrow
(5)-1 (See the figure below.) to release the lower pegs from the P/H
FRAME ASSEMBLY.
3.2.8.4 REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL5.1.6) 6. Open the REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY vertically and shift it to the
rear until it touches the bottom of the rear stud to release the hole in
1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.) the front from the front stud. Then lift up the front end and pull it out
to the upper front to remove the REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY.
2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)
4. Remove the screw (silver, 6mm) securing the REGI. EARTH WIRE
to the REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY and release the wire.
3.2.8.5 PRE-REGI. CLUTCH Removal (PL5.2.8) 6. Remove 2 E-rings fixing the PRE-REGI. SUPPORT and remove the
PRE-REGI. SUPPORT toward the rear.
1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)
7. Among 2 PRE-REGI. GEAR 1, remove the outer one to the rear
2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.) from the stud.
3. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.8.1.) 8. Disconnect the connector (P/J95) for the PRE-REGI. CLUTCH
NOTE: In the following step, hold the REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY to through the hole to the back of the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY.
keep it closed while turning over the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY.
9. Remove the PRE-REGI. CLUTCH from the stud and remove the
4. Remove 2 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the PRE-REGI. PRE-REGI CLUTCH.
GEAR ASSEMBLY and remove it.
4. Disconnect the connector (P/J94) for the REGI. CLUTCH from the
back of the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY and release the harness.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to lose the REGI.
UPPER BEARING, since it may come off when the REGI.
CLUTCH is removed.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to lose the REGI.
SPACER.
5. Pull the connector (P/J94) through the harness hole to the rear side
of the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY.
6. Remove the E-ring fixing the REGI. CLUTCH, and remove the
REGI. SPACER and REGI. CLUTCH from the stud to the rear.
3.2.8.8 REGI. BRAKE CLUTCH Removal (PL5.2.20) 7. Remove the REGI. BRAKE CLUTCH and REGI. BRAKE GEAR
from the REGI. BRAKE BRACKET.
1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)
7. Remove the E-ring fixing the REGI. OUT GEAR and remove the
REGI. OUT GEAR. Figure 3-53. REGI. METAL ROLL Removal
7. Remove the front E-ring fixing the REGI. RUBBER ROLL to remove
the REGI. GEAR. C H E C K When installing the REGI, RUBBER ROLL, be careful
P O IN T
not to damage the mylar film attached onto the P/H
8. Taking out the front REGI. LOWER BEARING, remove the REGI.
FRAME ASSEMBLY.
FRONT SPRING and REGI. LOWER BEARING.
9. Remove the E-ring securing the REGI. RUBBER ROLL by the rear
end. Then, taking out the rear REGI. LOWER BEARING, remove
the REGI. LOWER BEARING and the REGI. REAR SPRING.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to damage the mylar film
attached onto the P/H FRAME ASSEMBLY.
10. Lifting up the rear end of the REGI. RUBBER ROLL, pull out the roll
to the upper rear to remove.
4. Disconnect the connector (P/J93) for REGI. SENSOR from the back
of the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to break the hooks in the
P/H FRAME ASSEMBLY.
4. Remove the screw (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the OHP SENSOR
ASSEMBLY, and remove the OHP SENSOR ASSEMBLY from the
P/H FRAME ASSEMBLY.
4. Remove the screw (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the OHP SENSOR
ASSEMBLY, and remove the OHP SENSOR ASSEMBLY from the
P/H FRAME ASSEMBLY.
6. Remove the screw (gold, 6mm) securing the REAR OHP SENSOR
and remove the REAR OHP SENSOR.
7. Shift the ADC SENSOR ASSEMBLY to the rear to release the front
end from the frame. Then release the rear end of the shaft from the
frame, and take the ADC SENSOR ASSEMBLY out to the front.
4. Remove the connectors P/J86 and P/J116 for the ERASE LAMP
ASSEMBLY and the TONER BOX HARNESS, respectively.
5. Release the harnesses for the ERASE LAMP, ROS HARNESS, and
VIDEO HARNESS from the clamps.
NOTE: In the following step, be sure not to damage the IBT BELT
ASSEMBLY and the Magnet Rolls in the Developer
Assembly with such parts as XL RAIL ASSEMBLY and the
harnesses.
NOTE: In the following step, be sure to keep your hands off the IBT
BELT ASSEMBLY and the Magnet Roll surface.
3.2.9.6 WASTE TONER SENSOR Removal (PL6.1.42) 3.2.9.7 TONER BOX SENSOR Removal (PL6.1.43)
1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.) 1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)
2. Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE. (See Section 3.2.9.1.) 2. Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE. (See Section 3.2.9.1.)
3. Remove the ROS ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.3.) 3. Remove the ROS ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.3.)
4. Remove the XL RAIL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.5.) 4. Remove the XL RAIL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.5.)
5. Release the harness from the hook on the XL RAIL ASSEMBLY and 5. Release the harness for the TONER BOX SENSOR from the clamp.
the clamp.
6. Disconnect the connector (P/J83A) for the TONER BOX SENSOR.
6. Disconnect the connector (P/J88) for the WASTE TONER
SENSOR. 7. Unhook the TONER BOX SENSOR from the XL RAIL ASSEMBLY,
and remove the TONER BOX SENSOR.
7. Release the hooks securing the WASTE TONER SENSOR from the
XL RAIL ASSEMBLY, and remove the WASTE TONER SENSOR.
8)-2
8)-1
Figure 3-63. WASTE TONER SENSOR Removal Figure 3-64. TONER BOX SENSOR Removal
5. Take the harness for the ERASE LAMP ASSEMBLY out of the hole
to release it.
3.2.10 Development
NOTE: The generic term “Toner Cartridge” is used for “TONER
Cartridge Y”, “TONER CARTRIDGE M”, “TONER CARTRIDGE
C”, and “TONER CARTRIDGE K”.
2. Push up the ROTARY LATCH LEVER and turn the ROTARY KNOB
ASSEMBLY to set the Toner Cartridge to be replaced to the
replacing position.
NOTE: After removing the toner cartridge, place it level on a safe
surface.
3. Turn the lever on the cartridge to the unlocking position and take the
Toner Cartridge out.
8. Turn the ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY until the screw (silver, M4,
22mm) securing the Developer Assembly is aligned with the round
cutout in the frame in front. Then, remove the screw inserting a
driver.
NOTE: In the following step, note the points below.
n Never touch the Magnet Roll in the Developer Assembly.
n The ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY will rotate in the next step
since the ROTARY LATCH ASSEMBLY has been removed.
n After removing the Developer Assembly, place it level on a safe Figure 3-67. Developer Assembly Removal
surface.
A D J U S T M E N T Perform “Deve. Spacer Selection” after replacing the
R E Q U IR E D
9. Shift the Developer Assembly forward first. Then lift up the front part Developer Assembly. (Refer to Section 3.3.2.)
of the Developer Assembly and remove it.
4. Remove the screw (black, cup head, 8mm) securing the FAN
DUCT, and shift the FAN DUCT upward to release the hooks from
the frame. Then remove the FAN DUCT along with the DEVE. FAN.
3.2.10.5 ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY Removal (PL7.2.2) 18. Remove the LVPS. (See Section 3.2.16.1.)
1. Remove the FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.1.) 19. Remove the FUSER DRIVE ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.14.6.)
2. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.) 20. Remove the DEVE. CLUTCH ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.14.9.)
3. Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE. (See Section 3.2.9.1.) 21. Remove the DEVE. TIE PLATE. (See Section 3.2.15.1.)
4. Remove the TENSION LEVER. (See Section 3.2.11.1.) 22. Remove the screw (black, cup head, 8mm) securing the ROTARY
KNOB ASSEMBLY.
5. Remove the INNER COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.4.)
6. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.) 23. Using a standard driver, remove the ROTARY KNOB ASSEMBLY.
11. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY with the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY
and OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY installed. (See Section 3.2.12.1.)
15. Remove the ROTARY MOTOR PWB. (See Section 3.2.14.3.) Figure 3-71. ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY Removal (1/2)
26. Release the front end of the shaft in the ROTARY FRAME
ASSEMBLY from the U-cut in the base frame. Then shift the
ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY forward to release the rear end of
the shaft, and lift up the rear part of the ROTARY FRAME
ASSEMBLY and remove it.
3.2.10.6 CARTRIDGE SENSOR Removal (PL7.2.26) 9. Remove the screw (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the CARTRIDGE
SENSOR, and remove the CARTRIDGE SENSOR from the CART.
1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.) SENSOR HOLDER.
2. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)
6. Release the harness from the clamp holding the CART. SENSOR
HARNESS to the DEVE. TIE PLATE.
2. Disconnect the connector P/J87 and P/J197 for the USED CART.
SENSOR and the FRONT COVER SWITCH L, respectively, and
release the harnesses from the USED SENSOR PLATE.
4. Remove the screw (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the USED CART.
SENSOR and remove the USED CART. SENSOR from the USED
SENSOR PLATE.
3.2.11 IBT
3. Turn the TENSION LEVER to the locking position and remove the
screw (gold, with a washer, 12mm) securing the TENSION LEVER.
NOTE: It is better to use a magnetic forced screw driver to avoid
dropping screw inside the printer.
7. Draw out the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY and remove it along with the Figure 3-77. TRANSFER ASSEMBLY Removal (1/2)
MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)
16. Remove 2 screws (black, cup head, 12mm) securing the
8. Remove the ROS ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.3.) TRANSFER ASSEMBLY by the rear end.
9. Remove the ADC SENSOR ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.4.) 17. Remove the KL clip securing the SLIDE COLLAR at the front end of
the TRANSFER ASSEMBLY.
10. Remove the XL RAIL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.5.)
NOTE: In the following step, note the points below.
11. Remove the HVPS. (See Section 3.2.16.2.)
n Never get other parts come in contact with the IBT BELT
12. Install the TENSION LEVER and turn it to the unlocking position, ASSEMBLY.
then remove the lever again.
n Never touch the IBT BELT surface with your hands.
13. Release the 1ST BTR WIRE and the CONTACT ROLL WIRE from n Do not catch the wire in other parts such as frames.
the clamp and leave it on the inner side of the frame.
n Place the removed TRANSFER ASSEMBLY on a piece of paper
14. Disconnect the connector (P/J57) for the TRO SENSOR. spread on a flat level surface.
15. Loosen the screw (gold, with a washer, 8mm) securing the AUGER n To protect the IBT BELT ASSEMBLY, you can cover the both
HIGH ASSEMBLY at the back of the printer, and shift the AUGER right and left frames in the TRANSFER ASSEMBLY with paper.
HIGH ASSEMBLY right. Then fasten the screw back to fix the
AUGER HIGH ASSEMBLY.
18. Shift the SLIDE COLLAR inward and remove the IBT BEARING-4
from the frame. C H E C K n When installing the IBT BELT ASSEMBLY, cover the
P O IN T
belt surface with paper to protect it.
19. Lift up the both ends of the IBT DEVE ROLL ASSEMBLY in the
n When installing the TRANSFER ASSEMBLY, put the
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY about 20mm, then shift the front part of the
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY wire inside the printer first,
IBT DRIVE ROLL ASSEMBLY left and lift up the TRANSFER
then align the COLLAR-BUR in the TRANSFER
ASSEMBLY to remove.
ASSEMBLY with the IBT FRONT BRACKET and the
IBT REAR BRACKET.
3.2.11.4 BELT CLEANER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL8.1.30) NOTE: In the following step, place the removed BELT CLEANER
ASSEMBLY on a sheet of paper as toner may spill.
1. Remove the FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.1.)
4. Take the BELT CLEANER ASSEMBLY out from the left side of the
2. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY along with the EXIT TRAY printer.
ASSEMBLY and OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)
NOTE: In the following steps, toner might spill from the BELT
CLEANER ASSEMBLY. Be sure to place a sheet of paper
over the lower frame that is located under the BELT
CLEANER ASSEMBLY and handle the assembly carefully to
prevent toner from spilling.
3. Take the 2ND BTR ASSEMBLY out from the left side of the printer.
3.2.11.6 2ND BTR CAM ASSEMBLY Removal (PL8.1.10) 18. Remove 3 screws (gold, cup head, 4mm) securing the 2ND BTR
CAM ASSEMBLY.
1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to drop and lose the BTR
2. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.) BEARING-4 and the BTR BEARING-6 as they will come off.
3. Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE. (See Section 3.2.9.1.) 19. Shift the 2ND BTR CAM ASSEMBLY to the front and remove the
TORQUE GEAR SHAFT and the BTR CAM ASSEMBLY from the
4. Remove the TENSION LEVER. (See Section 3.2.11.1.) BTR BEARING-4 and the BTR BEARING-6, respectively.
5. Remove the INNER COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.4.) NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to catch the wire in the
frame.
6. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)
20. Lift the 2ND BTR CAM ASSEMBLY up to remove.
7. Pull out the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY with the MSI ASSEMBLY on it.
(See Section 3.2.8.1.)
11. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY with the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY
and the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)
14. Remove the BTR CAM SOLENOID. (See Section 3.2.11.3.) Figure 3-85. 2ND BTR CAM ASSEMBLY Removal
17. Release the DTS WIRE from all clamps and bring it to the inner side
of the frame.
3.2.11.7 AUGER HIGH ASSEMBLY Removal (PL8.1.40) 18. Remove the RIGHT COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.8.)
1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.) 19. Remove the CONTROLLER PWB. (See Section 1..)
2. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.) 20. Remove the CONT. CHASSIS ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.17.2.)
3. Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE. (See Section 3.2.9.1.) 21. Remove the screw (silver, 6mm) securing the CRUM CONNECTOR
ASSEMBLY and remove the CRUM CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY.
4. Remove the TENSION LEVER. (See Section 3.2.11.1.)
22. Remove the screw (gold, with a washer, 8mm) securing the AUGER
5. Remove the INNER COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.4.) HIGH ASSEMBLY at the back.
6. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)
7. Pull out the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY with the MSI ASSEMBLY on it.
(See Section 3.2.8.1.)
11. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY with the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY
and the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)
17. Remove the 2ND BTR CAM ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.11.6.)
Figure 3-86. AUGER HIGH ASSEMBLY Removal (1/3)
23. Remove the screw (gold, cup head, 8mm) and the E-ring securing
the AUGER HIGH ASSEMBLY at the left inner side (lower) of the
printer.
24. Remove the screw (gold, 6mm) securing the AUGER HIGH
ASSEMBLY at the middle inner side (upper) of the printer.
NOTE: In the following steps, toner might spill from the AUGER
HIGH ASSEMBLY. Be sure to place a sheet of paper over
the lower frame in the AUGER HIGH ASSEMBLY and
handle the assembly carefully to prevent toner from spilling.
NOTE: In the following step, place the removed AUGER HIGH
ASSEMBLY on a sheet of paper to receive spilt toner.
25. Move the AUGER HIGH ASSEMBLY forward to release it from the
peg and remove the AUGER HIGH ASSEMBLY.
7. Pull out the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY with the MSI ASSEMBLY on it.
(See Section 3.2.8.1.)
10. Remove the XL RAIL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.5.) Figure 3-92. TRO SENSOR Removal
13. Remove the screw (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the TRO
SENSOR and remove the TRO SENSOR.
5)-2
5)-2
Figure 3-93. OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal Figure 3-94. FUSER ASSEMBLY Removal
6. Supporting the terminal part in the front part of the H/R HEATER
with a driver or equivalent, remove the FUSER FRONT COVER and
place it inside the HEAT ROLL carefully.
NOTE: In the following step, avoid damaging the H/R HEATER and
the P/R HEATER when disconnecting the connector (P/
JF791) which is tightly connected.
7. Release the wire and harness from the hook on the FUSER REAR
COVER and disconnect the connector (P/JF791) for the P/R
HEATER and the H/R HEATER.
NOTE: In the following step, gear will be released as the FUSER
REAR COVER is removed. Be careful not to drop and lose
the gear.
Figure 3-97. H/R HEATER Removal
8. Remove the FUSER REAR COVER getting the rear terminals of the
P/H HEATER and H/R HEATER through the holes in the cover.
NOTE: In the following step, do not touch the H/R HEATER surface
when removing the H/R HEATER.
6. Supporting the terminal part in the front part of the H/R HEATER
with a driver or equivalent, remove the FUSER FRONT COVER and
place it in side the HEAT ROLL gently.
NOTE: The connector (P/JF791) to be disconnected in the next step
is firmly connected. Therefore, be careful not to break the H/
R HEATER and the P/R HEATER when disconnecting the
connector.
7. Release the wire and harness from the hook on the FUSER REAR
COVER and disconnect the connector (P/JF791) for the P/R
HEATER and the H/R HEATER.
NOTE: In the following step, gear will be released as the FUSER
REAR COVER is removed. Therefore, be careful not to drop
and lose the gear.
8. Remove the FUSER REAR COVER getting the rear terminals of the
H/R HEATER and P/R HEATER through the holes in the cover. Figure 3-98. P/R HEATER Removal
NOTE: In the following step, do not touch the H/R HEATER surface
when removing the P/R HEATER.
9. Remove the screw (gold, with a washer, 8mm) securing the P/R
HEATER and take out the P/R HEATER backward to remove.
3.2.12.8 FUSER EXIT SENSOR Removal (PL9.2.25) 3.2.12.9 UPPER GUIDE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.2.32)
1. Remove the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.1.) 1. Remove the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.1.)
2. Remove the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.) 2. Remove the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.)
3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.) 3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)
4. Remove the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.3.) 4. Remove the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.3.)
5. Remove the LOWER GUIDE ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.7.) 5. Remove the FUSER UPPER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.4.)
6. Disconnect the connector (P/J75) for the FUSER EXIT SENSOR. 6. Open the UPPER GUIDE ASSEMBLY and align the hinges with the
cutouts in the front and rear frames, and lift up the UPPER GUIDE
7. Release the hooks securing the FUSER EXIT SENSOR from the ASSEMBLY to remove.
FUSER BOTTOM PLATE and remove the FUSER EXIT SENSOR.
Figure 3-100. FUSER EXIT SENSOR Removal Figure 3-101. UPPER GUIDE ASSEMBLY Removal
8. Release the nuts securing the front and rear NIP SPRINGs.
10. Remove the H/R RING securing the rear H/R GEAR and remove the
rear H/R GEAR and the REAR H/R BEARING.
11. Remove the front H/R RING and remove the front H/R BEARING.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to damage the HEAT
ROLL surface.
12. Shift the HEAT ROLL backward to release the front end from the
frame. Then shift the roll forward and remove the HEAT ROLL.
11. Remove the screw (gold, 5mm) securing the FUSER INLET PLATE
Figure 3-103. PRESSURE ROLL Removal
and remove the FUSER INLET PLATE.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to damage the
PRESSURE ROLL surface.
C H E C K After installing the PRESSURE ROLL, perform the
P O IN T
12. Lift up the PRESSURE ROLL along with the P/H BEARING on the adjustment “NIP adjustment of the MAIN FUSER
front and rear ends, then remove the P/R BEARING from the ASSEMBLY”. (See Section 3.3.1.)
PRESSURE ROLL.
6. Disconnect the connector (P/J73) for the OIL CAM SOLENOID and
release the harness from the clamp.
Figure 3-106. OIL CAM SOLENOID Removal
7. Remove 2 screw (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the OIL CAM
SOLENOID and remove the OIL CAM SOLENOID.
6. Push the front EXIT-1 BEARING to the rear and slide the front part
of the EXIT-1 ROLL ASSEMBLY to the right.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not drop the EXIT-1
BEARING at the rear end of the EXIT-1 ROLL ASSEMBLY
since it will be released from the FUSER TRAY.
7. Shift the EXIT-1 ROLL ASSEMBLY forward to release the rear end
and remove the EXIT-1 ROLL ASSEMBLY to the rear along with the
EXIT-1 BEARING and the EXIT-1 GEAR.
8. Remove the EXIT-1 BEARING and the EXIT-1 GEAR from the Figure 3-112. EXIT-1 ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal
EXIT-1 ROLL ASSEMBLY.
2. Remove the two screws (gold, with a washer, 8 mm) securing the 5. Disconnect the connector (P/J80) for the FUSER CHUTE FAN.
HORIZONTAL CHUTE, and then lift up the HORIZONTAL CHUTE
to remove.
3. Remove the four screws (gold, tapped, 10 mm) securing the FUSER
BOTTOM COVER, and remove the FUSER BOTTOM COVER.
Rear
Front
3.2.13.3 EXIT LOWER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL10.1.1) 3.2.13.4 EXIT-2 ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL10.2.5)
1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.) 1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)
2. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.) 2. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)
3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY with the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY 3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY with the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY
and the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY on it. (See Section 3.2.12.2.) and the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY on it. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)
4. Remove the EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.2.) 4. Remove the EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.2.)
5. Disconnect 3 connectors (P/J111B, P/J161B, P/J89) for the EXIT 5. Remove the EXIT LOWER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.3.)
LOWER ASSEMBLY.
6. Remove 2 E-rings securing the EXIT-2 ROLL ASSEMBLY by the
6. Remove 5 screws (black, cup head, 8mm) securing the EXIT front and rear ends, and remove 2 SPUR GEARs, EXIT FRONT
LOWER ASSEMBLY, and remove the EXIT LOWER ASSEMBLY BEARING, and the EXIT REAR BEARING.
by lifting it up.
7. Remove the EXIT-2 ROLL ASSEMBLY.
3.2.13.5 EXIT-3 ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL10.2.7) 3.2.13.6 FUSER FAN Removal (PL10.2.15)
1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.) 1. Draw out the FUSER ASSEMBLY.
2. Remove front and rear E-rings securing the EXIT-3 ROLL 2. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)
ASSEMBLY.
3. Disconnect the connector (P/J111B) for the FUSER FAN and
3. Remove the SPUR GEAR, EXIT FRONT BEARING and EXIT release the harness from the clamp.
REAR BEARING.
4. Widen the hooks securing the FUSER FAN and remove the FUSER
4. Remove the EXIT-3 ROLL ASSEMBLY. FAN.
3.2.13.7 TOP EXIT SENSOR Removal (PL10.2.12) 3.2.13.8 EXIT CHUTE SWITCH Removal (PL10.2.13)
1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.) 1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)
2. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.) 2. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)
3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY with the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY 3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY with the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY
and the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY on it. (See Section 3.2.12.2.) and the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY on it. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)
4. Remove the EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.2.) 4. Remove the EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.2.)
5. Remove the EXIT LOWER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.3.) 5. Remove the EXIT LOWER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.3.)
6. Disconnect the connector (P/J165) for the TOP EXIT SENSOR. 6. Disconnect the connector (P/J166) for the EXIT CHUTE SWITCH.
7. Release the hooks securing the TOP EXIT SENSOR and remove 7. Release the hooks securing the EXIT CHUTE SWITCH and remove
the TOP EXIT SENSOR. the EXIT CHUTE SWITCH.
3.2.14 Drive 5. Remove 5 screws (black, cup head, 10mm) securing the P/H DRIVE
ASSEMBLY, and remove the P/H DRIVE ASSEMBLY along with 2
3.2.14.1 P/H DRIVE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.1) DRIVE CLAMP-Ys.
1. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.) 6. Remove the both 2 DRIVE CLAMP-Ys from the P/H DRIVE
ASSEMBLY.
2. Remove the HVPS. (See Section 3.2.16.2.)
4. Remove the screw (silver, cup head, 8mm) securing the DRIVE
CLAMP-N.
Figure 3-124. P/H DRIVE ASSEMBLY Removal (1/2) Figure 3-125. P/H DRIVE ASSEMBLY Removal (2/2)
3.2.14.2 P/H MOTOR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.3) 3.2.14.3 ROTARY MOTOR PWB Removal (PL11.1.21)
1. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.) 1. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY.(See Section 3.2.4.5.)
2. Disconnect 2 connectors (P/J49 and P/J50) from the P/H MOTOR NOTE: In the following step, the ROTARY MOTOR PWB will be
ASSEMBLY. kept connected to the printer body with the harness.
Therefore, be careful not to leave the ROTARY MOTOR
3. Remove 5 screws (black, cup head, 4mm) securing the P/H PWB too far from the printer.
MOTOR ASSEMBLY and remove the P/H MOTOR ASSEMBLY
along with 2 P/H MOTOR SUPPORTs. 2. Remove the screw (silver, cup head, 8mm) securing the ROTARY
MOTOR PWB and separate the ROTARY MOTOR PWB from the
4. Using pliers, remove the 2 P/H MOTOR SUPPORTs from the P/H printer body.
MOTOR ASSEMBLY.
3. Disconnect 3 connectors (P/J245, P/J246, P/J247) for the ROTARY
MOTOR PWB and remove the ROTARY MOTOR PWB.
Figure 3-126. P/H MOTOR ASSEMBLY Removal Figure 3-127. ROTARY MOTOR PWB Removal
Figure 3-129.
DISPENSE MOTOR ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
6. Remove the screw (black, cup head, 4mm) securing the P/H
MOTOR BRACKET, and remove the P/H MOTOR BRACKET.
3.2.14.8 PROCESS DRIVE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.10) 17. Remove 7 screws (black, cup head, 8mm) securing the PROCESS
DRIVE ASSEMBLY and remove the PROCESS DRIVE
1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.) ASSEMBLY.
2. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)
3.2.15 Frame
3.2.16 Electrical
4. Lift up the LVPS to release the hook on the left and remove the
LVPS.
3.2.16.2 HVPS Removal (PL13.1.2) 3.2.16.3 TOP COVER SWITCH Removal (PL13.1.3)
1. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.) 1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)
2. Disconnect 7 connectors (P/J41, P/J42, P/JA, P/JC, P/JD, P/JF, P/ 2. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)
JG) for the HVPS.
3. Disconnect the connector (P/J195) for the TOP COVER SWITCH.
3. Remove 4 screws (silver, cup head, 8mm) securing the HVPS and
remove the HVPS. 4. Remove the screw (black, cup head, 6mm) securing the TOP
COVER SWITCH, and remove the TOP COVER SWITCH.
Figure 3-137. HVPS Removal Figure 3-138. TOP COVER SWITCH Removal
2. Disconnect the connector (P/J82) for the DEVE. FAN and release
the harness from the FAN DUCT.
3. Widen the hooks on the FAN DUCT and remove the DEVE. FAN.
C H E C K n When installing the DEVE. FAN, set the side with the
P O IN T
maker label on it facing outside.
n When installing the DEVE. FAN, route the harness
properly.
6. Remove 4 screws (silver, cup head, 8mm) securing the MCU PWB
to the printer body and remove the MCU PWB.
Figure 3-140. MCU PWB Removal
6. Remove the screw (black, cup head, 6mm) securing the FRONT
COVER SWITCH L. Then pull out the harness through the cutout in
the frame and remove the FRONT COVER SWITCH L.
C H E C K
Figure 3-144. ENVIRONMENT SENSOR Removal
P O IN T
When fastening the screw, install the earth wire
together.
3.2.17 Controller
1. Remove the RIGHT COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.8.)
C H E C K When replacing the CONTROLLER PWB with a new Figure 3-145. CONTROLLER PWB Removal
P O IN T
one, be sure to install the current memory modules to
the new board. The modules to be moved are:
n Standard items:
Code Dimm (socket P), SD-RAM DIMM (slot 0)
n Optional items:
SD-RAM DIMM (slot S1, S2), DIMM module* (socket
A or B), Type B I/F card
* When installing the DIMM module, be sure to insert
the module to the correct slot A or B. The slot to be
used must be the same as on the old board.
3.2.17.1 CONTROLLER FAN Removal (PL 14.1.2) 3.2.17.2 CONT. CHASSIS ASSEMBLY Removal (PL 14.1.1)
1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.) 1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)
2. Remove the RIGHT COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.8.) 2. Remove the RIGHT COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.8.)
3. Disconnect the connector (P/J314) for the CONTROLLER FAN. 3. Remove the CONTROLLER PWB. (See Section 1..)
4. Remove 2 screws (gold, 20mm) securing the CONTROLLER FAN, 4. Remove the CONTROLLER FAN. (See Section 3.2.17.1.)
and remove the CONTROLLER FAN.
5. Remove 9 screws (silver, cup head, 8mm) securing the CONT.
CHASSIS ASSEMBLY and remove the CONT. CHASSIS
ASSEMBLY.
3.3 Adjustment 5. Install the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY and the OIL ROLL
ASSEMBLY, and close the FUSER ASSEMBLY.
This section describes how to perform NIP pressure adjustment and
6. Print a solid black belt (approximately 80mm × 289mm) in a A-4
Deve. Spacer Selection that are necessary to maintain the proper fuser
paper (orientation: SEF). (Use the /TOOL/FUSER/FUSE_TST.TRN
level for stable paper feeding.
file in the SELF TRAINING KIT CD-ROM.)
3.3.1 NIP Pressure Adjustment of the MAIN FUSER 7. Take out the FUSER ASSEMBLY.
ASSEMBLY NOTE:Perform the following steps promptly.
W A R N IN G
As the fuser can be very hot, be sure to perform the 8. Turning the green knob in the front, insert the printout with the black
adjustment carefully to avoid getting burnt. belt on it between the HEAT ROLL and the PRESSURE ROLL.
Make sure the paper is set in SEF orientation with the printed side
1. Draw out the FUSER ASSEMBLY well enough for servicing. facing to the HEAT ROLL (upward).
2. Remove the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.) 9. Remove the paper 10 seconds after insertion.
3. Remove the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.)
4. Turn the screws (A) securing the NIP SPRINGs by the right and left
ends of the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY to set the NIP SPRINGs
under the following condition (reference position):
The distance (B) between the head bottom of the screw and the
top surface of the metal above the NIP SPRING is 13.1mm.
10. See the output and check that the darkness of the area which was 11. If the result is not satisfactory, return to the step 4 and turn the NIP
pressed has changed. Measure the width of the changed area at the (A) in the direction shown below according to the result:
following 2 points:
The width is too narrow: Turn the screw clockwise
Points: 1) 15mm inward from the right edge.
The width is too wide: Turn the screw counterclockwise
2) 15mm inward from the left edge
If the result satisfies the following 2 points, adjustment is correctly 12. Perform the steps 7 to 10 until the result is good.
done. NOTE: Repeat the procedure promptly while the MAIN FUSER
-The width of each end is 4.8 mm ± 0.2mm ASSEMBLY is still hot enough.
NOTE: In the following step, do not touch the tracking roll surface with
your hands. If you touch the roll surface or find oil on it, wipe the
tracking roll surface well using a clean cloth to remove oil
completely.
6)-1
4. Using a clean cloth, clean the tracking roll (white) located in front of
the Developer Assy (in front of the Magnet Roll).
NOTE: In the following step, be sure to make a mark on the tracking roll.
Based on the mark, you will see how much the tracking roll
moves.
6)-2 5)
5. Make a mark on the tracking roll.
NOTE: Action in the next step is to prevent the tracking roll from
touching the earth plate. Neglecting this operation will cause the
earth plate to interfere with tracking roll’s movement.
6. Note the magnet Roll in the Developer Assembly and the tracking
roll move back and forth a little. To remove play, push the Magnet
Roll to the rear end. Then push the tracking roll to put it in contact Tracking Roll
with the ball bearing behind.
Figure 3-151. Tracking Roll
NOTE: See the points to note below for the next step:
n Rotate the ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY as slowly as possible.
If you rotate it fast, results of the tracking roll’s move amount 7)-2
measurement will disperse. Tracking Roll
n While rotating the ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY, check visually
that the dram flange (black) and tracking roll come in contact.
For a better view, you can remove the ROS ASSY. (If they are
not in contact, you need to use a smaller Deve. Spacer.)
Drum Flange
n Be sure to set the lever in the ROTARY LATCH ASSY to the top
position to keep the tracking roll away from the lever. If they are
left in contact, the tracking roll shifts together with the lever, and
you will fail to measure a correct move amount.
n If the Drum Flange (black) and tracking roll come in contact, the
tracking roll will move along with the Drum Flange.
7. Bring the lever in the ROTARY LATCH ASSY, which is used to fix
the Developer Assy, to the top, and then rotate the ROTARY
FRAME ASSY 360° clockwise as slowly as possible.
7)-1
NOTE: Tracking roll’s move amount and relevant contact length for the 13. Run a test print and check that printer operation and print quality are
Drum Flange and tracking roll is as describe below: normal.
Move amount is large: Contact length is long.
Move amount is small: Contact length is short.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to break the two hooks when
replacing the Developer Assy. (Use of a small standard screw
will facilitate the job.)
8. Measure the amount that the mark has moved from the original
position made in step 5.
9. Return the mark to the original position, and repeat the steps from 6
to 9 four times.
10. Take an average from the results and select it as the value. The
next action to be taken varies depending on the value, as described
below:
n If the value fits in the range from 3 mm to 5 mm (=most
suitable value), it means the currently used Deve. Spacer is
correct.
n If the value is larger than 5 mm, replace the current Deve. Move Amount
Spacer with Deve. Spacer 1.2, and perform the same operation
(from step 6 to step 9). Then select the size that provides more
suitable value.
n If the amount is smaller than 3 mm, replace the current Deve.
Spacer with Deve. Spacer 0.8 (then 0.5), and perform the same
operation (from step 6 to step 9). Then select the size that
provides the most suitable value.
4
DIAGNOSTICS
EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B
Contents
OVERVIEW .................................................................................................... 1 Analog Input Test: Device codes .........................................................32
Test print by MCU PWB .............................................................................1 Analog Output Test .............................................................................33
Test Print Pattern .......................................................................................2 Analog Output Test: Device codes ......................................................34
DIAGNOSTICS BY THE DIAGNOSTIC COMMANDER................................ 3 EEPROM Read ...................................................................................35
Introduction.................................................................................................3 EEPROM Write ...................................................................................37
Configuration .........................................................................................3 EEPROM Initialize ...............................................................................39
Diagnostic Commander .........................................................................4 NVM List ..............................................................................................40
Diagnostic PWB ....................................................................................4 Commands/Status List .............................................................................45
Command/Status........................................................................................5 Paper, Media & Output Control ...........................................................45
Introduction ............................................................................................5 Printing/Status Control ........................................................................47
Data Format ..........................................................................................5 Parameter Control ...............................................................................53
Command/Status Categories ................................................................6 Diagnostics control ..............................................................................58
Preparation.................................................................................................6 Error/Status Code ....................................................................................60
Personal Computer ...............................................................................6 Transfer MCU PWB Board NVRAM Engine Status to the New Board.....61
Installing the Diagnostic Commander ....................................................7
Uninstalling the Diagnostic Commander ...............................................7
Connecting the Diagnostic Tool ............................................................8
Diagnostic Commander: Operations ..........................................................9
Starting the Diagnostic Commander .....................................................9
Setting Up the Communication ..............................................................9
Sending/receiving commands/statuses ...............................................10
Automatically executing a command ...................................................12
[Service] tab ........................................................................................13
Displaying the log ................................................................................16
Life Counter Read/Write...........................................................................17
Read ....................................................................................................17
Write ....................................................................................................18
Executing Diagnostics ..............................................................................19
Diagnostic execution steps ..................................................................19
Diagnostics functions ..........................................................................19
Test Print .............................................................................................20
Digital Input Test ................................................................................21l
Digital Input Test: Device codes ..........................................................22
Digital Output Test ...............................................................................26
Digital Output Test: Device codes .......................................................27
Analog Input Test ................................................................................31
EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B
4.1 OVERVIEW NOTE: When disconnecting the short connector or turning the DIP
switch off, do not touch any other components.
You can perform a test print by using off-line diagnostics to check the NOTE: The paper feeder is selected with the previous panel setting.
printer operation.
NOTE: The paper size is selected with the previous panel setting when
Test print using the jumper setting on MCU PWB: Section 4.1.2 MSI tray is selected.
Test print using the diag board DIP switch setting: Section 4.2.1.3 NOTE: If the printer is in an error state, it will not print.
4. Connect the two pins on the test print connector (JP3) on the MCU
PWB. Use a short connector to connect the pins. If the MCU PWU
has DIP switches, turn on the switches.
NOTE:Do not touch the live components or driving units when doing
the following steps.
6. After the printer enters the READY mode, start the test print. (The
printer outputs test patterns continuously.)
7. To stop printing, disconnect the short connector that connects the Figure 4-1. Test Print Procedure
two pins. If the MCU PWB has a DIP switch, turn it off.
4.2.1 Introduction NOTE: The Diagnostic PWB, RS-232C cable, personal computer, and
Diagnostic Commander are collectively called the diagnostic tool
The diagnostic system is included on the CONTROLLER PWB, and the (maintenance tool). Diagnostic tool provided by SEIKO EPSON
diagnostic commander is not always performed. is as shown in the following table:
However, if you have replaced the MCU PWB, you need to perform
[Service] function using the Diagnostic Commander.
Table 4-1. Diagnostic Commander Tools
Tool Name Part Code Description
4.2.1.1 Configuration #F691 DIAGNOSTIC TOOL 1042425 Diagnostic PWB (board) and
Diagnostic Commander (2 floppy
You can run the various diagnostic routines and execute/set the various disks)
settings for the printer using the diagnostic tool (maintenance tool). The #F728 SELF TRAINING KIT 1050686
following figure shows the system configuration to perform the
diagnostics. You can run the diagnostic commander (application
software) on a personal computer and control the Diagnostic PWB to
send a command to the MCU PWB.
LED functions
4.2.2.1 Introduction
The commands and statuses are exchanged between the Printer
Controller and MCU PWB. Using the data (commands and statuses),
the Printer Controller controls the printer.
NOTE: The communication direction of the commands and statuses are
defined as follows: (These definitions are used throughout this The data format is defined as follows:
section.)
- Command: Printer Controller (diagnostic tool) → MCU PWB
1st byte: Command/status code
- Status: MCU PWB → Printer Controller (diagnostic tool) 2nd byte and the following bytes: Parameter code(s)
The parameter code bytes are variable. (Some commands/statuses
may not have any parameter.)
The codes are in HEX.
(1) Paper, Media & Output Control Use a personal computer that can run the Diagnostic Commander and
set the communication port (RS-232C).
Paper feed method (position), paper type, paper size setting/
check, paper ejection method (position), etc. (1) Personal Computer: Specifications
Table 4-4. Personal Computer Specifications
(2) Print/Status Control
Item Description
Print control, Operation mode setting, Error/Status code (printer
status) check, etc. Model IBM PC compatible
CPU Pentium133MHz or higher
(3) Parameter Control Memory 16 Mbytes or more
Display Resolution: 640x480 or higher (Color or
Life counters setting and check, etc. monochrome)
(4) Diagnostic Control OS Windows 95
Recommended PC IBM Think Pad 535
Various diagnostics start/stop, EEPROM read/write, Test print
parameter settings, etc.
NOTE:The IBM Think Pad 535 has been verified for running the
Diagnostic Commander. Any IBM PC compatible machine
should be able to run the Diagnostic Commander, though it
does not fully guarantee its operation.
(2) Communication Port
Table 4-5. Communication Port
Item Format Item Format
Port No. 1 Parity Odd
Speed 9600bps Stop bit 1
Start bit 1 Transfer control Full duplex
Data length 8 bits Flow control Yes (RTS/CTS)
4.2.3.2 Installing the Diagnostic Commander 4.2.3.3 Uninstalling the Diagnostic Commander
The following describes how to install the Diagnostic Commander: The following describes how to uninstall the Diagnostic Commander in
the computer.
1. Start Windows 95. Select [Settings] from the [Start] menu. Select
[Control Panel] in [Settings]. 1. Start Windows 95. Select [Settings] from the [Start] menu. Select
[Control Panel] in [Settings].
2. Double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon in the [Control Panel]
window. 2. Double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon in the [Control Panel]
window.
3. Insert the Diagnostic Commander installation disk “DIAG. TOOL-1
Disk 1” in the floppy disk drive. 3. Select [Renoir Service Commander V2.01] in the [Add/Remove
Programs Properties] window. Click the [Add/Remove (R)] button.
4. Click [Setup (I)] button in the [Add/Remove Programs Properties]
window. 4. Follow the instructions and complete uninstalling the program.
5. Follow the instructions and install the Diagnostic Commander. NOTE:The RS-232C cable must be the correct cable for the DIP
switch setting on the Diagnostic PWB and the connector. The
6. Select [Renoir Service Commander V2.01] cable must be properly shielded and the length must be 2
meters or shorter.
7. From the SELF TRAINING KIT CD, select TOOL>DIAG>Disk3>
XXXX.DAT. Then copy the selected XXXX.DAT file to the DAT
folder under the folder in which you installed Diagnostic
Commander.
4. Connect the RS-232C cable between the Diagnostic PWB and the
personal computer.
NOTE:The RS-232C cable must be the correct cable for the DIP
switch setting on the Diagnostic PWB and the connector. The
cable must be properly shielded and the length must be 2
meters or shorter.
3. To close the Diagnostic Commander, click the [Close] button. 3. Click the [Sync] button to establish communication.
NOTE:Click the [Service] button to establish the communication.
NOTE:Click the [Disconnect] button first to go to another menu from
the [Manual] or [Auto] menu.
[Manual] tab window
4.2.4.3 Sending/receiving commands/statuses A single click only displays the command code in the
NOTE: A command must be sent after the communication has been [Command] box.
established.
NOTE: For details, Section 4.2.7 “Commands/Status List” in this
section.
[Selecting from the pull-down menu]
NOTE: Some command codes and parameter codes are not displayed
in the pull-down menu.
3. Click the [Class] box. Select the category that has the command you
want to send. (There are four categories, described in Section
4.2.2.3 “Command/Status categories”.) A double-click displays the command code in the [Command]
box; if the selected command code has a parameter, the
4. Select the command code that you want to send from the command appropriate parameter code is also displayed.
code list.
6. As the same manner, the parameter code is displayed in the Inputting a command directly in the [Command] box.
[Command] box. When you select a parameter code from the list, if
you double-click the command code and the command code does You can input a command into the [Command] box as follows:
not have a parameter code in the lower level, the [Error] window
appears. 1. Click the [Manual] tab. The Manual screen appears.
7. Click the [Send] button to send the command. 4. Click the [Send] button to send the command.
NOTE:If you want to select another command without sending the
5. If the selected command has its corresponding status, the status is
selected command, move the cursor into the parameter code
displayed in the [Status] box in HEX.
selection window. Click the right mouse button. The [Go
Back] button appears. Click the [Go Back] button to return to NOTE: When you want to go to either the ([Auto] or [Service]) menu,
the previous parameter code. Repeat this step until you find first disconnect the connection (by clicking the [Disconnect]
the desired command. button), then go to another menu.
3. Click the [File Open] button. The [Auto Run File Open] window
appears.
On the [Service] tab page, you can write data (specifications) in the You can write data (specifications) in the MCU PWB EEPROM (NVM).
MCU PWB EEPROM (NVM), set a password, read/write the Master and
read/initialize the Slave. NOTE: If you have replaced the MCU PWB, you need to run the [NVM
Write]. If you do not run [NVM Write], the specification settings
NOTE: Master: COMMUNICATION ASSEMBLY differ and the printer may not function properly.
Slave: MCU PWB NVM
1. Click the [NVM Write] button.
If you click the [Service] tab, the communication is established and the
following screen appears. 2. The specification (data file) selection screen appears.
3. From the list, select an appropriate data file (XXXX.DAT) that has
the correct specifications.
NOTE: “XXXX.DAT” files must be located in “\Renoir Service
Commander2.01\dat” folder, otherwise they are not displayed.
[Master Read]
In the [Master Read] page, you can read the contents of the [Master].
NOTE: Before you run [Master Read], make sure that the
communication has been established. If you run [Master Read]
when the communication has not been established, the
Diagnostic Commander may hang up.
In the [Slave Read] page, you can read the contents of the [Slave]. In the [Slave Initialize] page, you can initialize (erase) the [Slave] data.
NOTE: Before you run [Slave Read], make sure that the communication C A U T IO N
has been established. If you run [Slave Read] when the Do not run [Slave Initialize] unless instructed to do so
communication has not been established, the Diagnostic in this manual.
Commander may hang up.
NOTE: Before you run [Slave Initialize], make sure that the
1. Click the [Slave Read] button. communication has been established. If you run [Slave Initialize]
when the communication has not been established, the
2. The data read from the Slave is displayed, as shown below: Diagnostic Commander may hang up.
Table 4-8. Contents of the Master
1. Click the [Slave Initialize] button.
Serial No. Header (top 4-digit)
APC0 BBD0 BBE0 BBF0 BBG0 2. The [Slave] is initialized.
[OEM Code] 03 03 03 03 03
NOTE: After you initialize the [Slave], turning the power ON/OFF
[Part No.] 8382 9140 9141 9142 9143
automatically writes the data in the Slave.
[Serial No.] A unique Serial No. for the product (last 6-digit.).
NOTE: There may be more tasks you need to do before turning the
These values must be the same as appeared in [Master Read]. If power ON/OFF after the Slave initialization. Follow the
not, you need to perform [Slave Initialize] described in the next instructions in this manual.
section.
1. Move the cursor to the white area (blank area) in the main window
of the [Renoir Service Commander]. Click the right mouse button.
The [Log Window Open] button appears.
>>: Command, <<: Status
2. Click the [Log Window Open] button. The [Log Window] appears.
You can read the life counter data from the MCU PWB EEPROM (NVM) Table 4-9. Life Counter Read Specifications
or write the data in the EEPROM (NVM) using the Parameter Control
commands/statuses. Item Command Note
Drum Cartridge D0 00
NOTE: Before you replace the MCU PWB, do the following: Toner Cartridge Y D0 01 Accumulated dispense time
Toner Cartridge M D0 02 Accumulated dispense time
(1) Read the data from the life counters in the MCU PWB before
Toner Cartridge C D0 03 Accumulated dispense time
replacement.
Toner Cartridge Bk D0 04 Accumulated dispense time
(2) Replace the MCU PWB. Main Fuser Assembly (1) D0 06 Accumulated dispense time
Main Fuser Assembly (2) D0 0C Image counts
(3) Write the life counter data in the MCU PWB after 2nd BTR Assembly D0 09
replacement. Belt Cleaner Assembly D0 0A
Oil Roll Assembly D0 0B PV counts
NOTE: If you cannot read the data from the new MCU PWB after
Whole printer (1) D0 05 Accumulated prints
replacement, write an expected value (estimated from future
Whole printer (2) D0 07 Accumulated image counts
usage conditions) in the MCU PWB.
NOTE: If you replace a periodically replaced part (in the MAIN FUSER NOTE: The statuses for the above commands have 4 bytes as shown
ASSEMBLY, 2nd BTR ASSEMBLY or BELT CLEANER below:
ASSEMBLY) or DRUM CARTRIDGE (without CRUM function Example)
specifications) with a new one, write "0" in V1 through V4. Command: D0 09
NOTE: You can do the same in the EEPROM Read/Write function Status D0 09 V1 V2 V3 V4
described in Section 4.2.6 “Executing Diagnostics”. If you run V1 through V4 are decimal values, indicating the
the EEPROM Read/Write function after replacing the MCU accumulated counts.
PWB, you do not need to read/write the life counter data using "123, 456": "00 12 34 56"
the Parameter Control function.
NOTE: You can use the Parameter Control commands and statuses to
read/write the setting values in the registrations.
4.2.5.2 Write
NOTE: For V1 through V4, write the values you have read in the
previous section. If any of the values is larger than the life over
value (threshold value), replace the part that has the large value
and write the value "00 00 00 00". If you cannot replace the part,
write the life over value.
NOTE: After setting the parameters for the test print, you have to send
the DIAGOFF command (76) and then the PFC command (70
00 F0 01) to run the test print.
NOTE: The grids in the above table are the same as the patterns shown
in Section 4.1.2 “Test Print Pattern".
NOTE: If "Wide" has been set in the Image Area Selection for the MCU
PWB EEPROM (NVM), there will not be right/left margins in the
test print pattern.
The printer prints the patch test print patterns (Cin50% patch) as shown You can detect the High/Low level in the signals output from a switch or
below. sensor that has a digital signal.
NOTE: Cin50% patch: Image that has been developed for every 3 dots.
Table 4-13. Digital Input Test Parameter
For more details, see Chapter 2.
DIAGON command: 75 DIAGOFF command: 76
NOTE: Depending on the specifications, there may not be a top margin DIAGSTART command (Digital Input Test): 90 01 XX XX
and the top part of the image may be out of the paper area. DIAGSTOP command (Digital Input Test): Unnecessary
NOTE: Use paper longer than 210mm in the paper feed direction. Parameter Function Data (Hex)
1 Diagnostic type 01: Digital Input Test
NOTE: If "Wide" has been set in the Image Area Selection for the MCU
2 Code_DI Device code (see Section 4.2.6.5.)
PWB EEPROM (NVM), there will not be right/left margins in the
3 Data Status: 00: Low, 01: High or XX (Data)
test print pattern.
With status (90 01 XX XX) only
NOTE: The status parameter 3 (data) is 1 byte data (Hex) in the device
code 32, 3F, 43, 44 and 45.
Example) Coomand
90 01 03
TRO Sensor
Digital Input Test
DIAGSTART command
Example) Status
90 01 03 01
High
TRO SNR
Digital Input Test
DIAGSTART command
Table 4-16. Digital Input Test Device Codes (3/7) Table 4-17. Digital Input Test Device Codes (4/7)
Digital Input Test [DIAGSTART: 90 01 XX, DIAGSTOP: Unnecessary] Digital Input Test [DIAGSTART: 90 01 XX, DIAGSTOP: Unnecessary]
Table 4-18. Digital Input Test Device Codes (5/7) Table 4-19. Digital Input Test Device Codes (6/7)
Digital Input Test [DIAGSTART: 90 01 XX, DIAGSTOP: Unnecessary] Digital Input Test [DIAGSTART: 90 01 XX, DIAGSTOP: Unnecessary]
4.2.6.6 Digital Output Test NOTE: While the Process Motor Assembly, P/H Motor Assembly and
Developer Clutch Assembly are on, and the Developer
Components controlled by the digital signals can be turned ON/OFF. Assembly is in the development position, do not turn on the DB
Table 4-21. Digital Output Test Parameter output (AC component) or DB output (AC component) and DB
DIAGON command: 75 DIAGOFF command: 76
output (DC component) at the same time.
DIAGSTART command (Digital Output Test): 90 02 XX NOTE: Do not keep the Dispense Motor Assembly turned on for more
DIAGSTOP command (Digital Output Test): 91 02 XX than 10 seconds to prevent toner from being clogged too much
Parameter Function Data in the developer assembly and gears from being damaged.
1 Diagnostic type 02: Digital Output Test NOTE: While the Process Motor Assembly is turned off and the P/H
2 Code_D0 Device code (See 4.2.6.7.) Motor Assembly on, do not set the 2nd BTR in the advanced
3 DGST [Status only] 06: Passed, 07: Failed position to prevent the IBT Belt Assembly from being damaged.
With status (90 02 XX XX)
NOTE: While the 2nd BTR is set in the advanced position, do not turn
Example) Command Example) Status on the Process Motor Assembly to prevent the IBT Belt
Assembly from being damaged.
90 02 21 90 02 21 06
NOTE: Do not turn on the 1st BTR with the Process Motor Assembly
MSI_CL Passed turned off to prevent the IBT Belt Assembly from being
Digital Output Test MSI_CL
damaged.
DIAGSTART command Test Print
DIAGSTART command NOTE: When the Process Motor Assembly and the P/H Motor
Assembly are turned off, do not turned on the 2nd BTR to
Install all covers when the laser beam is active and NOTE: Do not turn on the P/H Motor Assembly without the Drum
exposed. Cartridge or the Waste Toner Box, otherwise the toner will spill.
Do not touch motors and drive assemblies when they NOTE: Do not turn on the P/H Motor Assembly or the Developer Clutch
are running. Assembly when the Development Assembly is out-of-place to
prevent the inside of the printer from contaminated and the
NOTE: Do not turn on the BCR, Erase Lamp Assembly and the LD in gears from being damaged due to improper engagement.
the ROS Assembly with the Process Motor Assembly turned
NOTE: Do not turn on the H/R Heater and the P/R Heater for more than
OFF to prevent fatigue in the Drum Cartridge.
3 seconds to prevent the Main Fuser from being damaged.
NOTE: After having replaced the Drum Cartridge with a new one, do not
turn on the Process Motor Assembly ON to prevent the Cleaning
Blade from rotating in reverse.
4.2.6.7 Digital Output Test: Device codes Table 4-23. Device Codes for Digital Output Test (2/8)
Digital Output Test [DIAGSTART: 90 02 XX, DIAGSTOP: 91 02 XX]
C A U T IO N
If there is a <Warning!> or <Caution!> in the Check
column, first confirm the warnings and cautions listed Code Function item
Name Check
on the previous page to prevent problems. (Hex) Function
Process Motor <Warning!><Caution!>
Assembly Check visually and
MAIN_MOT 10 Sets the PROCESS auditorially that the
Table 4-22. Device Codes for Digital Output Test (1/8) MOTOR ON signal Process Motor Assembly
to Low. is functioning.
Digital Output Test [DIAGSTART: 90 02 XX, DIAGSTOP: 91 02 XX]
Rotary Motor <Warning!><Caution!>
Code Function item Assembly Check the Rotary Motor
Name Check Hold signal. (By
(Hex) Function ROTARY_MOT_PO
15 Sets the ROTARY executing this test with
WER
HR_CUT_SEL 00 Not allowed. - MOTOR HOLD Code 16, the Rotary
ROS Assembly signal to Low Motor Assembly is put on
VDENB 01 Sets the LD ENB Check the LD ENB signal. hold.
signal to Low. Rotary Motor <Warning!><Caution!>
ROS Assembly Assembly Check the Rotary Motor
LD_ON 05 Sets the VDATA Check the VDATA signal. ROTARY_MOT 16 Sets the ROTARY ON signal. (The Rotary
signal to High MOTOR ON signal Motor Assembly is ready
WD_CAN 09 Not allowed. - to Low. for rotation.)
OPT_TRAY2 0A Not allowed. - HVPS <Warning!><Caution!>
DUP_START 0C Not allowed. - Do not check the 2nd
BTR_2ND 17 Sets the 2ND BTR BTR output.
RTS_CL 0D Not allowed. -
ON signal to Low. Check the 2nd BTR ON
OPT_TRAY 0E Not allowed. -
signal.
Process Motor <Warning!><Caution!>
HVPS <Warning!><Caution!>
Assembly Check visually and
Do not check the 1st BTR
auditorially that the
BTR_1ST 18 Sets the 1ST BTR output.
Process Motor Assembly
ON signal to Low. Check the 1st BTR ON
MAIN_MOT_SPEED 0F Sets the PROCESS rotation speed has been
MOTOR HALF- reduced to half. (By signal.
SPEED signal to executing this test with HVPS <Warning!>
Low. Code 10, the Process Do not check the DB
Motor Assembly rotation DEVE_DC 19 Sets the DB DC ON output.
speed is reduced to half.) signal. Check the DB DC ON
signal.
If there is a <Warning!> or <Caution!> in the Check Table 4-27. Device Codes for Digital Output Test (6/8)
C A U T IO N
column, first confirm the warnings and cautions listed Digital Output Test [DIAGSTART: 90 02 XX, DIAGSTOP: 91 02 XX]
on the previous page to prevent problems.
Code Function item
Name Check
(Hex) Function
Table 4-26. Device Codes for Digital Output Test (5/8)
Developer Fan <Warning!>
Digital Output Test [DIAGSTART: 90 02 XX, DIAGSTOP: 91 02 XX] Check visually or
auditorially that the
Code Function item Developer Fan rotation
Name Check Sets the DEVE. FAN
(Hex) Function REAR_FAN_SPEED 31 has been reduced. (By
HALF-SPEED signal
executing this test with
Feed Solenoid to High.
Code 26, the Developer
(Cassette 1)
Fan rotation speed is
CST1_FEED_SOL 28 [1] Sets the FEED reduced.)
SOLENOID ON
Fuser Fan <Warning!>
signal to Low.
Check visually or
Registration Brake
auditorially that the Fuser
Clutch FUFSER_FAN_SPE Sets the FUSER Fan rotation has been
REGI_BRK 2C Sets the REGI. 32
ED FAN HALF-SPEED reduced. (By executing
BRAKE CLUTCH signal to High. this test with Code 27, the
ON signal to Low. Fuser Fan rotation speed
By corresponding the
Developer Clutch is reduced.)
clicking sound, check if
Assembly ADC Sensor Turn the ADC Sensor ON/
the clutch or solenoid has
MAG_ROLL_CL 2D Sets the DEVE. Assembly OFF the light emitter in
been activated.
CLUTCH ON signal this diagnostic function.
By corresponding the ADC_LED 33
to Low. Sets the LED ON Run the ADC Sensor input
clicking sound, check if
BTR CAM Solenoid signal to Low. test in the Analog Input
the clutch or solenoid has
Sets the BTR CAM Test.
BTR_2ND_SOL 2E been activated.
SOLENOID ON Exchange Solenoid
signal to Low. Turns on the Check visually or
PATH_SOL_PUSH 34 EXCHANGE auditorially (clicking
Oil Cam Solenoid
sound) that the Exchange
Sets the OIL CAM SOLENOID PUSH
OIL_ROLL_SOL 2F ON signal. Solenoid is functioning.
SOLENOID ON (You can change the Face
signal to Low. Exchange Solenoid Up/Face Down with the
Cleaner CAM Turns on the Exchange Chute that is
Solenoid PATH_SOL_PULL 35 EXCHANGE controlled by the
IBT_CLEANER_SOL 30 Sets the CLEANER SOLENOID PULL Exchange Solenoid.)
CAM SOLENOID ON signal.
ON signal to Low.
If there is a <Warning!> or <Caution!> in the Check Table 4-29. Device Codes for Digital Output Test (8/8)
C A U T IO N
column, first confirm the warnings and cautions listed Digital Output Test [DIAGSTART: 90 02 XX, DIAGSTOP: 91 02 XX]
on the previous page to prevent problems.
Code Function item
Name Check
(Hex) Function
Table 4-28. Device Codes for Digital Output Test (7/8)
Feeder Motor Check visually and
Digital Output Test [DIAGSTART: 90 02 XX, DIAGSTOP: 91 02 XX] Sets the FEEDER auditorially that the
OPT_FEEDER_MOT 58
MOTOR ON signal to Feeder Motor is
Code Function item Low. functioning.
Name Check
(Hex) Function Feed Solenoid-3T
ADC Sensor By the clicking sound, OPT_TRAY2_SOL 59 Sets the [2] FEED
Assembly check that the ADC SOLENOID ON
ADC_CLEAN_SOL 36 Sets the ADC Solenoid in the ADC signal to Low.
SOLENOID ON Sensor Assembly is Feed Solenoid-3T By the clicking sound,
signal to Low. functioning. Sets the [3] FEED check if the clutch or
OPT_TRAY3_SOL 5A
Erase Lamp SOLENOID ON solenoid are functioning.
Remove the Top Cover. signal to Low.
Assembly
Visually check that the Feed Solenoid-3T
ERASE_LAMP 37 Sets the ERASE
Erase Lamp Assembly
LAMP ON signal to OPT_TRAY4_SOL 5B Sets the [4] FEED
has been turned on.
Low. SOLENOID ON
Used Cartridge Turn ON/OFF the light signal to Low.
Sensor, Cartridge emitter in the sensors in Turn Clutch-3T
CART_PHOTO_LED 3C Sensor this diagnostic function. OPT_TURN_ROLL_2 Sets the [2] TURN
5C
Sets the SENSOR Run the Digital Input Test _CL CLUTCH ON signal
ON signal to High. for each sensor. to Low.
By the clicking sound,
OPT_DUP_MOT_SP Turn Clutch-3T
50 Not allowed. - check if the clutch or
EED OPT_TURN_ROLL_3 Sets the [3] TURN
5D solenoid has been
OPT_DUP_MOT 51 Not allowed. - _CL CLUTCH ON signal activated.
OPT_ROLL_FRONT to Low.
52 Not allowed. -
_CL Turn Clutch-3T
OPT_ROLL_BACK_ OPT_TURN_ROLL_4 Sets the [4] TURN
53 Not allowed. - 5E
CL _CL CLUTCH ON signal
OPT-REVERSE_CL 54 Not allowed. - to Low.
OPT_FORWARD_CL 55 Not allowed. -
OPT_DUP_PATH_S
56 Not allowed. -
OL_PUSH
OPT_DUP_PATH_S
57 Not allowed. -
OL_PULL
4.2.6.8 Analog Input Test NOTE: The status data consists of 2 bytes; the lower byte is displayed
first.
You can run this test to detect the signal levels of the sensors and
output monitors that output an analog signal.
Example) Status
C A U T IO N Do not run this test unless specified in this manual or
instructed to do so. 90 03 01
ADC_SNR
Analog Input Test
Table 4-30. Analog Input Test Specifications DIAGSTART command
4.2.6.11 Analog Output Test: Device codes Table 4-35. Analog Output Test: Device codes (2/2)
Analog Output Test [DIAGSTART: 90 04 XX, DIAGSTOP: 91 04 XX XX]
C A U T IO N If there is a <Warning!> or <Caution!> in the Check column,
first confirm the warnings and cautions listed on the previous Function item
Code
page to prevent problem. Name Signal Check
(Hex)
Data range
Table 4-34. Analog Output Test: Device codes (1/2)
HVPS
<Warning!><Caution!>
Analog Output Test [DIAGSTART: 90 04 XX, DIAGSTOP: 91 04 XX XX] Outputs the DTS CONT
DTCK_SAW_OUT 05 signal that has the value Check the HVPS by
Function item based on the data.
reading the DTS
Code Controller signal.
Name Function Check 00 - FFh (0 - 4.1[V])
(Hex)
Rotary Motor Assembly
Data range
Outputs the Rotary
HVPS Motor Clock signal that <Warning!><Caution!>
<Warning!> <Caution!>
Outputs the 2BTR CONT has the value based on Check visually that the
Check the HVPS by
BTR_1ST_OUT 00 signal that has the value the data. Rotary Motor Assembly
based on the data. reading the 2BTR
Controller signal. 00h: Home position rotates at the specified
00 - FFh (0 - 4.1[V]) Deve Rotary Motor 0A 01h: 30°, 02h: 45°, angle. (Simultaneously
HVPS 03h: 60°, 04h: 90°, running this test with
<Warning!><Caution!> Digital Output Test 16
Outputs the 1BTR CONT 05h: 120°, 06h: 150°,
BTR_2ND_OUT 01 signal that has the value Check the HVPS by 07h: 210°, 08h: 240°, rotates the Rotary Motor
reading the 1BTR 09h: 300°, 0Ah: 330°, Assembly.)
based on the data.
Controller signal. 0Bh: 360°, 0Ch: 90°,
00 - FFh (0 - 4.1[V])
0Dh: 15°
HVPS <Warning!><Caution!>
Outputs the BCR DC Check the HVPS by
BCR_DC_OUT 02 CONT signal that has the reading the BCR DC
value based on the data. Controller signal.
00 - FFh (0 - 4.1[V])
HVPS <Warning!><Caution!>
Outputs the DB DC Check the HVPS by
DEVE_DC_OUT 03 CONT signal that has the reading the DB DC
value based on the data. Controller signal.
00 - FFh (0 - 4.1[V])
ROS Assembly
<Warning!><Caution!>
Outputs the VREF signal
LD_POWER 04 that has the value based Check the ROS
Assembly by reading
on the data.
the VREF signal.
00 - FFh (0 - 4.1[V])
4.2.6.13 EEPROM Write NOTE: Enter the lower byte of the 2 bytes in the Code_EP (NVM
number) first, then enter the second byte.
You can change the data in the MCU PWB EEPROM (NVM) by writing
new data in it. NOTE: Enter the lowest byte of the 4 bytes in the status data first, then
enter the second, third and fourth bytes.
C A U T IO N Do not modify any NVM numbers except when NOTE: If the data is a negative value, -1 is represented as FFh, -2 is
instructed to do so in this manual. If you change any of FEh, ... and so on.
the other NVH numbers, the system setting may be
corrupted. Example) Command
NOTE: You can read some of the data items listed in Section 4.2.5 “Life
Counter Read/Write”“If you read/write data when you replace
the MCU PWB, you do not need to run the EEPROM Read/
Write.
Table 4-40. NVM List (2/8) Table 4-41. NVM List (3/8)
EEPROM Read [90 05 XX XX], EEPROM Read [90 05 XX XX],
EEPROM Write [90 06 XX XX XX XX XX XX] EEPROM Write [90 06 XX XX XX XX XX XX]
Table 4-42. NVM List (4/8) Table 4-43. NVM List (5/8)
EEPROM Read [90 05 XX XX], EEPROM Read [90 05 XX XX],
EEPROM Write [90 06 XX XX XX XX XX XX] EEPROM Write [90 06 XX XX XX XX XX XX]
Table 4-44. NVM List (6/8) Table 4-45. NVM List (7/8)
EEPROM Read [90 05 XX XX], EEPROM Read [90 05 XX XX],
EEPROM Write [90 06 XX XX XX XX XX XX] EEPROM Write [90 06 XX XX XX XX XX XX]
(2) Statuses
Table 4-52. Status List of the Printing/Status Control
Status code Parameter
Name Description
(Hex) code
1. AMODE
PFA % 30 2. SHEET1 Allows paper feed.
3. SHEET2
ENGERR % 31 None Printer error.
ERRRV % 32 None Cancels the printer error.
ENGWRN % 33 None Printer warning.
1. STSMODE
SSENG C0 2. STSMODE2 [Response] Error data on printer status.
3. STSCALL
SSCONS C1 1. STSCONS [Response] Error data on the consumables.
SSTRAY C2 1. STSTRAY [Response] Error data on the paper Cassette
[Response] Error data on the Drum Cartridge
SSCRUM C3 1. STSCRUM
CRUM function.
1. STSJAM
SSJAM C4 [Response] Error data on paper jam.
2. STSPAPER
1. STSHW1
2. STSHW2
SSHW C5 [Response] Error data on the hardware.
3. STSHW3
4. STSHW4
SSLIFE C6 1. STSLIFE [Response] Error data on life.
SSOPEN C7 1. STSOPEN [Response] Error data on opening (cover, etc.)
1. STSWARN1
SSWARN C8 2. STSWARN2 [Response] Error data on warning.
3. STSWARN3
A status with “%” is a voluntary status from the printer.
Table 4-55. SSENG Status Parameters Table 4-56. SSCONS/SSTRAY/SSCRUM Status Parameters
SSENG status code: C0 SSCONS status code: C1
SSTRAY status code: C2
Data
STSMODE STSMODE2 STSCALL SSCRUM status code: C3
(Bit)
LIGHT SLEEP Consumable error Data
7 - STSCONS STSTRAY STSCRUM
mode -> (SSCONS command: C1) (Bit)
DEEP SLEEP No paper -> (SSTRAY No paper in
6 DIAG TEST mode 7 No Yellow toner Communication error
mode command: C2) Cassette 1
CRUM error -> (SSCRUM No paper in
5 WARM UP mode - 6 No Magenta toner Verification error
command: C3) Cassette 2
Acknowledge Print Paper jam -> (SSJAM No paper in Used Drum Cartridge was
4 - 5 No Cyan toner
Quality mode command: C4) Cassette 3 installed.
Hardware error -> (SSHW 4 No Black toner No paper in MSI ID error
3 READY mode -
command: C5) Full Waste Toner No paper in
3 Count error
Life over -> (SSLIFE Box Cassette 4
2 PRINTING mode -
command: C6) 2 No Fuser Oil - Dummy error 1
Cover open -> (SSOPEN 1 - - Dummy error 2
1 ERROR mode -
command: C7) 0 - - -
Warning -> (SSWARN
0 - -
command: C8)
Table 4-57. SSJAM Status Parameters Table 4-58. SSHW Status Parameters (1/2)
SSJAM status code: C4 SSHW status code: C5
Data Data
STS JAM STS PAPER STSHW1 STSHW2
(Bit) (Bit)
Paper jam in the Exit Upper 7 - Fuser overheat error
Remaining paper in the Exit Upper
7 Assembly/Exit Lower 6 Option error Ross Assembly error
Assembly/Exit Lower Assembly
Assembly 5 2nd BTR error Process Motor Assembly error
Paper jam in the Main P/H Remaining paper in the Main P/H 4 Fuser warm-up error Recognition function error
6
Assembly Assembly
3 Oil Roll Assembly: Not installed Paper Cassette 2 is not set.
Paper jam in the Fuser Remaining paper in the Fuser
5 2 Main Fuser Assembly error Paper Cassette 3 is not set.
Assembly Assembly
1 - Heater error
4 - -
0 High density error Paper Cassette 1 is not set.
3 - -
2 Size mismatch -
OHP Front/Back: wrong Table 4-59. SSHW Status Parameters (2/2)
1 -
setting
Static jam (remaining paper) - SSHW status code: C5
0 -
> (STSPAPER)
Data
STSHW3 STSHW4
(Bit)
7 High density error Toner Cartridge Y: Not installed.
6 Low density error Toner Cartridge M: Not installed.
5 P/H Motor Assembly error Toner Cartridge C: Not installed.
4 Environment Sensor error Toner Cartridge Bk: Not installed.
3 Rotary Motor Assembly error PCDC error
2 Fuser low temperature error Contamination ADC Sensor
1 Waste Toner Box: Not installed. Paper Cassette 4 is not set.
0 MCU PWB error -
Table 4-60. SSLIFE/SSOPEN Status Parameters Table 4-61. SSWARN Status Parameters
SSLIFE status code: C6 SSWARN status code: C8
SSOPEN status code: C7
Data
STSWARN1 STSWARN2 STSWARN3
Data (Bit)
STSLIFE STSOPEN
(Bit) Yellow toner: Life Drum Cartridge: Life Cassette 1: Remaining
7
7 Drum Cartridge: Life over Front Cover Assembly: Open warning warning paper warning
6 - Main P/H Assembly: Open Magenta toner: Life Cassette 2: Remaining
6 -
5 - Exit Upper Assembly: Open warning paper warning
4 2nd BTR Assembly: Life over Main Fuser Assembly: Open Cyan toner: Life Cassette 3: Remaining
5
warning paper warning
3 Belt Cleaner Assembly: Life over -
Belt Cleaner
2 Main Fuser Assembly: Life over - Black toner: Life Cassette 4: Remaining
4 Assembly: Life
1 - Feeder Chute Assembly: Open warning paper warning
warning
0 - - Waste Toner Box: 2nd BTR Assembly Full paper in Top
3
Full warning warning Cover Assembly
Oil Roll Assembly:
2 Printer: Life warning -
Life warning
Main Fuser
1 Assembly: Life - -
warning
0 - - -
NOTE: If the life counter value read by the LIFCNTR command is larger
than the life over value read by the LIFLIMR, write the life over
value in the LIFCNTSET command.
(1) Commands
Table 4-63. Command List of the Parameter Control (2/2)
Table 4-62. Command List of the Parameter Control (1/2)
Command Parameter
Command Parameter Command Description
Command Description code (Hex) code
code (Hex) code
Reads the minimum time-out
1.LIFE, 2.V1, TIMMINR D4 1.TIM
value.
LIFCNTSET # 80 3.V2, 4.V3, Writes data in the life counter.
5.V4 Reads the maximum time-out
TIMMAXR D5 1.TIM
value.
1.LIFE, 2.V1, <Do not use this command
unless instructed!> Reads the controlled value (that
LIFLIMSET # 81 3.V2, 4.V3, CTLVALR D6 1.CTL
changes).
5.V4 Changes the life over value.
CTLSETR D7 1.CTL Reads the control value.
Changes the life over value to
LIFDEF # 82 1.LIFE Reads the privilege to access
the default. CTLACCSR D8 1.CTL
the control value.
<Do not use this command
1.TIM, 2.V1, Reads the minimum control
TIMSET # 83 unless instructed!> CTLMINR D9 1.CTL
3.V2, 4.V3 value.
Changes the time out value.
Changes the time-out value to Reads the maximum control
TIMDEF # 84 1.TIM CTLMAXR DA 1.CTL
the default. value.
TIMSETR D2 1.TIM Reads the time-out value. Note: The parameter codes V1 through V4 are in decimal. Enter a value from the
upper byte so that it can be read normally.
TIMUNITR D3 1.TIM Reads the time-out unit.
(2) Statuses
Status code
Status Parameter code Description
(Hex)
1.LIFE, 2.V1, 3.V2, 4.V3, 5.V4, [Response] Life counter
LIFCNTR D0
6.V5, 7.V6, 8.V7, 9.V8
(1) Commands
Table 4-69. Status List of the Diagnostic Control
You can identify an error/status code of this printer from the following
C1-04
statuses in the Printing/Status Control in the command/status category:
SSENG, SSCONS, SSTRAY, SSJAM, SSHW, SSLIFE, SSOPEN and
SSWARN.
A detection error is set by bit in the parameter in each status. (For
details on the parameters, see Section 4.2.7 “Command/Status List”.)
Section 2 Troubleshooting lists the error/status codes that have the Parameter 1 -> 04h (Bit 2: ON): No Fuser Oil
same status codes. SSCON status
NOTE: In Section 2 Troubleshooting, a “-” is used in place of a space
between bytes.
Example)
C5-00-20-00-00
4.2.9 Transfer MCU PWB Board NVRAM Engine Status to the New Board
To transfer the engine status data in the previous MCU PWB NVRAM to appears confirming that the "LOG file has been edited as AT file"
the new MCU PWB, follow the steps below. and saved with the “.AT” extension. Press the Return key again to
close this program.
1. Locate the C_READ_E.AT and CVTLOGAT.EXE files in the
“TOOL\DIAG\AT_FILE” folder of the SELF TRAINING KIT CD- 8. Turn the printer off, and replace the old MCU PWB with the new
ROM, and copy the files to the “Renoir Service Commander one.
2.01\AUTO“ in the folder that contains Diagnostic Commander.
9. Install the Diagnostic Board in the printer, connect it to the PC again,
2. Install the Diagnostic Board instead of the MAIN CONTROLLER and turn the printer on. Execute the Diagnostic Commander again.
PWB to the printer, connect it to the PC with the serial I/F, and turn
the printer on. Then execute the “”Renoir Service Commander” on 10. Choose “NVM Write” on the “Service” menu.*
the Windows 95.
11. Right-button click in the background (gray area) to open “Log
3. From the “Auto” menu, click “File Open”, and open the Window”, and choose “Log Clear” to close the “Log Window”.
“C_READ_E.AT” file.
12. Choose “File Open” on the Auto menu, and in the Auto folder open
4. Select “Connect”, “Sync”, and then “Start”. The printer perform the the file you named and saved in a previous step (xxxxxxxx.AT).
engine initialization when the printer accept the program.
13. Select Connect, Sync, and then Start. The printer perform the
5. Right-click in the background (gray area) inside the Auto menu's engine initialization when the printer accept the program.
frame, and click “Log Window Open”. The current data stored in the
14. Close the Diagnostic Commander, and turn off the printer.
installed MCU PWB NVRAM appears in the “Log Window”.
15. Replace the Diagnostic Board with the CONTROLLER PWB.
6. After checking the data in the Log Window, right-button click in the
window and then click “Log Save”. Give the file a name, up to eight 16. Print the engine status sheet, and make sure that all of the old
characters long and ending with the .LOG extension, and save it in counter readings have been transferred to the new MCU PWB.
the Auto folder.
* If the newly installed MCU PWB has been used before, choose Slave
7. Select and execute the “CVTLOGAT.EXE” file in the "Renoir
Initialize and turn the printer off and back on before choosing NVM
Service Commander 2.01\AUTO " folder, and in the menu that
Write.
appears enter the full name of the log file you saved in the previous
step. Then press the Return key following the menu. A message
5
TROUBLESHOOTING
EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B
Contents
OVERVIEW .................................................................................................... 1 FIP-1.29 ENVIRONMENT SENSOR Related Error ..........................45
Troubleshooting Procedure ........................................................................1 FIP-1.30 ROTARY MOTOR ASSY (HP Detection) Related Error .....46
Self-Diagnostic Function by LCD Message................................................1 FIP-1.31 WASTE TONER BOX is Out ..............................................47
Status Message ....................................................................................3 FIP-1.32 MCU PWB MEMORY (RAM) Error .....................................48
Error Message ......................................................................................4 FIP-1.33 TONER CARTRIDGE Y/M/C/K is Out ................................49
Warning Message ......................................................................................9 FIP-1.34 PCDC Error ........................................................................49
Service-Call Error messages....................................................................12 FIP-1.35 ADC SENSOR Error ...........................................................50
LEVEL 1 FIP (FAULT ISOLATION PROCEDURE)..................................... 14 FIP-1.36 Periodically Replaced Part - End Of Life ............................51
FIP-1.1 Y/M/C/K TONER CARTRIDGE TONER is Out ......................15 FIP-1.37 No Power is Applied. ..........................................................52
FIP-1.2 WASTE TONER BOX is Full ................................................16 FIP-1.38 Abnormal Print Motion ........................................................53
FIP-1.3 FUSER OIL in the OIL ROLL ASSY is Out ...........................17 FIP-1.39 CONTROLLER PWB Firmware Related Error ...................54
FIP-1.4 Paper Out - Cassette 1 .........................................................18 FIP-1.40 DIMM (SLOT P) Related Error ...........................................54
FIP-1.5 Paper Out - MSI Tray ...........................................................19 FIP-1.41 SD-RAM (SLOT S0, S1, S2) Related Error ........................55
FIP-1.6 DRUM CARTRIDGE Related Problem .................................20 FIP-1.42 CONTROLLER PWB IC8, IC9 Related Error .....................55
FIP-1.7 Paper Jam - Exit ...................................................................21 FIP-1.43 DIMM Related Error ............................................................56
FIP-1.8 Paper Jam - REGI. ...............................................................22 FIP-1.44 DIMM (Slot A, B) Related Error ..........................................56
FIP-1.9 Paper Jam - FUSER .............................................................23 FIP-1.45 CONTROLLER PWB EEPROM (IC3) Related Error ..........57
FIP-1.10 Wrong Paper Size .............................................................25 FIP-1.46 CONTROLLER PWB ASIC (IC22, IC23) Related Error .....57
FIP-1.11 OHP Sheet is Improperly Set .............................................26 FIP-1.47 CONTROLLER PWB and Other Hardware Related Errors 58
FIP-1.12 Paper Exit - Static Jam .......................................................27 FIP-1.48 “FRONT COVER OPEN” ....................................................59
FIP-1.13 Paper REGI. - Static Jam ...................................................27 FIP-1.49 “PAPER UNIT OPEN” ........................................................60
FIP-1.14 PAPER Static Jam - FUSER ..............................................28 FIP-1.50 “EXIT COVER OPEN” ........................................................61
FIP-1.15 2ND BTR Resistance Error .................................................29 FIP-1.51 “FUSER UNIT OPEN” ........................................................62
FIP-1.16 MAIN FUSER ASSY Related Error .....................................30 FIP-1.52 “PAPER OUT LC1” .............................................................63
FIP-1.17 OIL ROLL ASSY is Out ......................................................31 LEVEL 2 FIP (FAULT ISOLATION PROCEDURE) .................................... 64
FIP-1.18 MAIN FUSER ASSY is Out .................................................32 FIP-2.1 LVPS 5VDC is Defective .......................................................64
FIP-1.19 DRUM CARTRIDGE is Out ................................................33 FIP-2.2 LVPS 24VDC is Defective ....................................................65
FIP-1.20 High Resolution Error .........................................................34 FIP-2.3 TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR is Defective .............................68
FIP-1.21 MAIN FUSER ASSY Overheat Error ..................................35 FIP-2.4 LOW PAPER SENSOR is Defective ....................................69
FIP-1.22 ROS ASSY Related Error ...................................................36 FIP-2.5 SIZE SWITCH ASSY is Defective ........................................70
FIP-1.23 PROCESS MOTOR ASSY Related Error ...........................37 FIP-2.6 FEED SOLENOID is Defective .............................................71
FIP-1.24 MCU PWB EEPROM Error .................................................38 FIP-2.7 MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR is Defective ...............................72
FIP-1.25 CASSETTE 1 is Out ...........................................................39 FIP-2.8 MSI LONG N/P SENSOR is Defective .................................73
FIP-1.26 High Density Error ..............................................................40 FIP-2.9 MSI EDGE SENSOR is Defective ........................................74
FIP-1.27 Low Density Error ...............................................................41 FIP-2.10 MSI CLUTCH is Defective ..................................................75
FIP-1.28 P/H MOTOR Related Error ................................................43 FIP-2.11 PICK UP SOLENOID is Defective ......................................76
EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B
FIP-2.12 FRONT OHP SENSOR is Defective ...................................77 FIP-3.9 Creased paper ....................................................................116
FIP-2.13 REAR OHP SENSOR is Defective .....................................78 FIP-3.10 Improper fusing .................................................................117
FIP-2.14 REGI. SENSOR is Defective ..............................................79
FIP-2.15 REGI. CLUTCH is Defective ...............................................80
FIP-2.16 PRE-REGI. CLUTCH is Defective ......................................81
FIP-2.17 WASTE TONER SENSOR is Defective ..............................82
FIP-2.18 TONER BOX SENSOR is Defective ...................................83
FIP-2.19 ROS ASSY is Defective ......................................................84
FIP-2.20 ADC SENSOR is Defective ................................................86
FIP-2.21 ADC SOLENOID is Defective .............................................87
FIP-2.22 CARTRIDGE SENSOR is Defective ...................................88
FIP-2.23 USED CART. SENSOR is Defective ..................................89
FIP-2.24 ROTARY SENSOR is Defective .........................................90
FIP-2.25 TRO SENSOR is Defective ................................................91
FIP-2.26 BTR CAM SOLENOID is Defective ....................................92
FIP-2.27 FUSER IN SENSOR is Defective .......................................93
FIP-2.28 FUSER EXIT SENSOR is Defective ...................................94
FIP-2.29 TEMP. SENSOR ASSEMBLY is Defective .........................95
FIP-2.30 OIL CAM SOLENOID is Defective ......................................96
FIP-2.31 CLEANER CAM SOLENOID is Defective ...........................97
FIP-2.32 TOP EXIT SENSOR is Defective ........................................98
FIP-2.33 PROCESS MOTOR ASSY is Defective ..............................99
FIP-2.34 P/H MOTOR ASSY is Defective .......................................100
FIP-2.35 ROTARY MOTOR ASSY is Defective ..............................101
FIP-2.36 DISPENSE MOTOR ASSY is Defective ...........................102
FIP-2.37 DEVE. CLUTCH ASSY is Defective. ................................102
FIP-2.38 HVPS is Defective ............................................................103
FIP-2.39 Electrical Noise .................................................................105
PRINT QUALITY TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................. 106
Print Quality Troubleshooting Entry Chart..............................................106
Print Quality FIP .....................................................................................107
FIP-3.1 Low image density ...............................................................108
FIP-3.2 Blank prints .........................................................................109
FIP-3.3 Black prints .........................................................................110
FIP-3.4 White/light deletion along the Paper Feed Direction ...........111
FIP-3.5 White/Shady deletion lines appear vertically
to the paper feeding direction .............................................112
FIP-3.6 Black/Color Spots ...............................................................113
FIP-3.7 Toner Smearing ..................................................................114
FIP-3.8 Skew ...................................................................................115
EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B
H a s th e tr o u b le r e c u r r e d ?
Table 5-1. LCD Message List (1/3)
LED Description
Y e s N o Message Category Refer to
On Line Continue
Check OHP Sheet Off Off Error Table 5-6
Check Paper Size On Off Warning Table 5-15
T o u b le s h o o tin g Display at power on Off Off Status -
1 . G o to S e c tio n "5 .2 F IP 1 ". Exiting Paper Jam Off Off Error Table 5-6
2 . G o to S e c tio n "5 .3 F IP 2 ". Exit Cover Open Off Off Error Table 5-8
3 . G o to S e c tio n "5 .4 P r in t Q u a lity
Feed Jam Off Off Error Table 5-7
T r o u b le s h o o tin g " .
4 . F u rth e r tro u b le s h o o tin g r e fe r r in g to Feeder Cover Open Off Off Error Table 5-9
C h a p te r 2 , C h a p te r 4 , a n d A p p e n d ix . Format Error DIMM g On Off Warning Table 5-15
Form Feed Off Off Status Table 5-5
(Displayed during test print)
(PJL RDYMSG)
M a in te n a n c e Front Cover Open Off Off Error Table 5-8
Fuser Unit Open Off Off Error Table 5-8
G o to C h a p te r 6 " M a in te n a n c e " .
Illegal Aux I/F Card Off Off Error Table 5-13
Illegal DIMM g Off Off Error Table 5-13
Figure 5-1. Troubleshooting Flowchart Image Optimum On Off Warning Table 5-15
Table 5-2. LCD Message List (2/3) Table 5-3. LCD Message List (3/3)
LED Description LED Description
Message Category Reference Message Category Reference
On Line Continue On Line Continue
Insert Oil Roll Off Off Error Table 5-8 Turn Paper Off Off Error Table 5-10
Insert Photocondctr Off Off Error Table 5-7 uuuu Toner Crtg Out *5 Off Off Error Table 5-7
Insert sss *1 Off Off Error Table 5-9 uuuu Toner Low *5 On Off Warning Table 5-16
Insert Waste T Box Off Off Error Table 5-8 uuuu Toner Out *5 Off Off Error Table 5-9
Irregular Density Off Off Error Table 5-7 Warning Photocondctr On Off Warning Table 5-16
Maintenance Req hhhh *2 On Off Warning Table 5-17 Warming Up On Off Status Table 5-4
Manual Feed sss tttt *1 *3 Off Off Error Table 5-10 Waste T Box Nearfull On Off Warning Table 5-16
Mem Overflow Off Blinking Error Table 5-12 Writing Data DIMM On Off Status Table 5-5
Menus Locked On Off Warning Table 5-17 Writing Data RAM On Off Status Table 5-5
(Panel-setting display) (PJL OPTMSG)
Need Memory On Off Warning Table 5-15 (PJL STMSG)
Oil Roll Near Empty On Off Warning Table 5-17 Writing DIMM A On Off Status Table 5-5
Paper Jam Off Off Error Table 5-6 Writing DIMM P On Off Status Table 5-5
Paper Out sss tttt *1 *3 Off Off Error Table 5-11 Write Error Data DIM Off Off Error Table 5-14
Paper Set sss tttt *1 *3 Off Off Error Table 5-11 Write Error Data RAM Off Off Error Table 5-14
Paper Unit Open Off Off Error Table 5-9 Write Error DIMM A Off Off Error Table 5-13
Photocondctr Trouble Off Off Error Table 5-8 Write Error DIMM P Off Off Error Table 5-13
Print overrun Off Blinking Error Table 5-12 Wrong Photoconductor Off Off Error Table 5-8
Ready On Off Status Table 5-5 Notes:
Regulating Printer On Off Status Table 5-4
1. sss: Shows Printing Menu’s Paper Source Value (If value is other than “Auto”.)
Replace Photocondctr Off Off Error Table 5-9 2. hhhh: See Table 5-17.
Replace Waste T Box Off Off Error Table 5-10 3. tttt: Shows Printing Menu’s Page Size value.
Replace Oil Roll Off Off Error Table 5-10 4. effff: Refer to Section 5.1.4, “Service-Call Error”.
Reset Off Off Status Table 5-4 5. uuuu=YMCK, Displays relevant letters only.
Reset All Off Off Status Table 5-4
Reset to Save Off Off Status Table 5-4
Self Test Blink Off Status Table 5-4
Service Req effff *4 On On Service-call Table 5-20
error Table 5-21
Table 5-22
Table 5-23
Standby Levelv On Off Status Table 5-5
Table 5-8. Error Message List (3/9) Table 5-9. Error Message List (4/9)
Table 5-10. Error Message List (5/9) Table 5-11. Error Message List (6/9)
Table 5-12. Error Message List (7/9) Table 5-13. Error Message List (8/9)
o Mem Overflow Explanation Attempted to write to ROM module or write operation failed to
terminate normally; ROM module is not set in the slot A.
LED status 1/2. On Line = off, Continue = blinking
Solution 1. Turn off the printer.
Explanation While processing a print job, the printer ran out of memory.
2. Perform a Reset All operation.
Recovery/continuation is not possible.
Solution 1. If the Auto Cont setting on the printer's Device menu is o Write Error DIMM P
disabled, select and follow one of the solutions below. LED status On Line = off, Continue = off
lPress the Continue button and if the error was caused Explanation Attempted to write to ROM module; write operation failed to
because graphic data exceeded buffer size, the printer ignores terminate normally; data reception failed; there was an error in the
the command which caused the error ejects the page before checksum for the received data; failed to secure receive-data
the error. On the other hand, the cause of the error was a area; or specified device value was improper.
failure in registering the font macro pattern or so, the printer
Solution 1. Turn off the printer.
ignores the bad command and continues to print.
lReset the printer or perform a warm boot. 2. Perform a Reset All operation.
2. If the Auto Cont setting on the printer's Device menu is 3. If error recurs, service the printer.
enabled, the printer will automatically override the paper error
and undergoes the same process depending on the cause, as
described above.
Table 5-17. Warning Message List (3/4) Table 5-18. Warning Message List (4/4)
o u u u u Toner Low (continued) o Oil Roll Near Empty
Solution Do one or more of the following to clear the warning message. LED Message No effect on LED state.
1. Press the Continue button. Explanation The fuser oil is running low. (The engine's detection system
2. Perform a Reset operation. calculates the remaining level of fuser oil, and generates
3. Replace the indicated toner cartridge with a new one. this message when it determines that the fuser oil will run out
after printing 1,000 more pages (A4, 5% duty, black print:color
o Warning Photocondctr print=1:1).
LED Message No effect on LED state. Solution It is recommended that the Fuser Oil Roll be replaced when
Explanation The photoconductor unit is approaching the end of its life. The this message appears (although it is possible to continue
engine's detection system calculates the remaining using the existing oil roll until the "Replace Oil Roll" error
lifetime, and generates this message when the number of occurs). Do any of the following to clear the warning
pages left approaches: message.
Color print: 1,125 pages (A4, 4.5% duty) 1. Press the Continue button.
Black print: 4,500 pages (A4, 4.5% duty) 2. Perform a Reset operation.
Solution It is recommended that the photoconductor unit be replaced 3. Replace the Fuser Oil Roll with a new one.
when this message appears (although it is possible to
o Maintenance Req hhhh *1
continue using the existing unit until the "Replace
Photocondctr" error occurs). Do any of the following to clear LED Message No effect on LED state.
the warning message. Explanation A warning condition that cannot be corrected by the user has
1. Press the Continue button. occurred, and this condition requires maintenance.
2. Perform a Reset operation. Specifically, one or more of the internal units that cannot be
replaced by the user is nearing the end of its life.
3. Replace the photoconductor unit with a new one.
Solution Although the user can continue to operate the printer until the
o Waste T Box Nearfull "Service Req effff" error occurs, the user should write down
LED Message No effect on LED state. the warning code and call for service before the service
Explanation The Waste Toner Collector is almost full. (The engine's required state is reached; otherwise the printer may stop
detection system calculates the level of waste toner, and working partway through a print job. Do either of the following
generates this message when the Waste Toner Collector is to clear the warning message.
full. 1. Press the Continue button.
Solution It is recommended that the Waste Toner Collector be 2. Perform a Reset operation.
replaced when this message appears (although it is possible o Menus Locked
to continue using the existing box until the "Replace Waste T
Box" error occurs). Do any of the following to clear the LED Message No effect on LED state.
warning message. Explanation Panel setting change was attempted though the “Panel Lock”
1. Press the Continue button. is able in EJL.
2. Perform a Reset operation. Solution Press Continue button.
3. Replace the Waste Toner Collector with a new one.
*1: See the following table which lists the Maintenance-Call Error
Message.
5.1.4 Service-Call Error messages Table 5-21. Engine Related Service-Call Error
Error Type Error Code
If the error detected is a user-recoverable one, all LEDs on the LCD e ffff
Explanation Refer to:
panel come on to indicate Service-Call Error. The types of the error vary
E 0003 Fuser Unit error (end of life) FIP-1.36
depending on the location and condition, and they are identified by the E 0008 Bad Engine NVRAM FIP-1.24
error codes indicated on the LCD panel. make a note of the error E 0014 Engine communication error FIP-1.47
information currently indicated and turn the printer off and back on. If
E 0020 ADC sensor is dirty FIP-1.35
the same error is still indicated, service the printer by checking/ E 0022 Bad PCDC FIP-1.34
replacing the relevant part(s). E 0023 IBT Cleaner end of life FIP-1.36
E 0024 2nd BTR end of life FIP-1.36
Table 5-20. Service-Call Error Classification E 0025 Reserved −
Service Call Error effff E 0030 Fuser Unit abnormality (timeout) FIP-1.16
LED Message All on E 0031 Fuser Unit abnormality (no fuser unit) FIP-1.18
Explanation The "effff" codes vary to indicate the nature of the service call. E 0032 Fuser Unit abnormality (overheat) FIP-1.21
e = error classification code E 0033 Fuser Unit abnormality (lamp) FIP-1.16
E = engine related error E 0034 Fuser Unit abnormality (temperature low) FIP-1.16
C = controller related error E 0035 Error at Large Capacity Paper Unit FIP-1.25
ffff: error code (see tables 5-10 and 5-11) E 0036 Bad resistance at 2nd BTR FIP-1.15
Solution 1. Turn off the printer. E 0037 Reserved −
2. Check the following regarding the RAM, DIMM, ROM E 0038 MCU PWB memory error FIP-1.32
module, and optional interface card
Make sure all boards are installed in the proper locations. E 0039 Environment sensor error FIP-1.29
Make sure all boards satisfy the specification requirements E 0040 ROS motor error FIP-1.22
and are compatible with the printer's controller. E 0041 PROCESS MOTOR ASSY (lBT) error FIP-1.23
Make sure all boards are connected properly.
E 0042 P/H motor error FIP-1.28
3. Turn the printer back on.
E 0043 Abnormal toner density (too high) FIP-1.26
4. If the same error appears, write down the code and service
the printer accordingly. E 0044 Abnormal toner density (too low) FIP-1.27
E 0045 ROTARY Home-Position sensor error FIP-1.30
See the following tables for the detailed information on the Service-Call
Error messages.
Table 5-22. Controller Related Service-Call Error (1/2) Table 5-23. Controller Related Service-Call Error (2/2)
Error Error Error Error
Explanation Refer to: Explanation Refer to:
Type Code Type Code
C 0017 CPU error (undefined interrupt) FIP-1.47 C 1021 SD RAM DIMM error (Slot 1) FIP-1.41
C 0081 CPU error (TLB correction exception) FIP-1.47 C 1022 SD RAM DIMM error (Slot 2) FIP-1.41
C 0082 CPU error (TLB miss exception [Load/Fetch]) FIP-1.47 C 1100 ROM checksum error (IC9) FIP-1.42
C 0083 CPU error (TLB miss exception [Store]) FIP-1.47 C 1101 ROM checksum error (IC8) FIP-1.42
CPU error (Address-error exception [Load/ C 1120 ROM DIMM (P) checksum error (bits 0 to 7) FIP-1.43
C 0084 FIP-1.47
Fetch]) C 1121 ROM DIMM (P) checksum error (bits 8 to 15) FIP-1.43
C 0085 CPU error (Address-error exception [Store]) FIP-1.47 C 1122 ROM DIMM (P) checksum error (bits 16 to 23) FIP-1.43
C 0086 CPU error (Bus error exception [Fetch]) FIP-1.47 C 1123 ROM DIMM (P) checksum error (bits 24 to 31) FIP-1.43
C 0087 CPU error (Bus error exception [Load/Store]) FIP-1.47 C 1180 Checksum error: optional ROM module A FIP-1.44
C 0088 CPU error (SYSCALL exception) FIP-1.47 C 1181 Checksum error: optional ROM module B FIP-1.44
C 0089 CPU error (Break exception) FIP-1.47 C 1185 Unsupported ROM module FIP-1.44
C 0090 CPU error (Reserved command exception) FIP-1.47 C 1200 EEPROM (IC15) write error FIP-1.45
CPU error (Coprocessor-not-in-use EEPROM (IC15) write limit (number of writes
C 0091 FIP-1.47 C 1210 FIP-1.45
exception) reached limit)
C 0092 CPU error (FPU exception) FIP-1.47 C 1400 Engine initialization error FIP-1.47
C 0093 CPU error (TLB exception) FIP-1.47 C 1500 CCNV (IC22) hardware error FIP-1.46
C 0094 CPU error (XTLB exception) FIP-1.47 C 1600 CPGI (IC23) hardware error FIP-1.46
C 0095 CPU error (cache exception) FIP-1.47 C 1999 Other hardware error FIP-1.47
C 0096 CPU error (Trap exception) FIP-1.47 C 2000 Software error* FIP-1.47
C 0097 CPU error (FPU exception) FIP-1.47
C 0098 CPU error (Watch exception) FIP-1.47 *: If soft errors occur, you may want to use the #F691 Diagnostic Tool to
0128~ perform “Slave Initialize” (from the service menu). After performing
C CPU error (Undefined trap) FIP-1.47
0254 the command, trun the printer off and back on. For details, see
C 0255 CPU error (NMI exception) FIP-1.47 Chatper 4.
C 0256 CPU error (Division by zero) FIP-1.47
C 0257 CPU error (Operation overflow) FIP-1.47
C 0258 CPU error (break) FIP-1.47
C 0800 IPL error (Controller problem) FIP-1.42
Error in standard RAM (Capacity below
C 1002 FIP-1.41
standard, or other)
C 1010 Verify error FIP-1.41
C 1020 SD RAM DIMM error (Slot 0) FIP-1.41
C H E C K <Preliminary inspection>
P O IN T
In each FIP, you are required to perform the
“Preliminary inspection” prior to any other actions.
The Preliminary inspection involves the following:
n Check for any part that does not meet the
specifications.
n Check if any part has been installed improperly.
n Check for part that is damaged, deformed, smeared,
or lodged with foreign matter.
Remedy
Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
WASTE TONER SENSOR, WASTE TONER BOX,
TONER BOX, MCU PWB
Check: Transparency area of the WASTE TONER
BOX • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 3.
l Is the transparency are in the upper part of the Replace or clean the WASTE TONER • Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
2
WASTE TONER BOX smeared or lodged with any BOX. 2.17 "WASTE TONER SENSOR is
foreign matter? Defective".
l Is the sensor flag part inside the box floating?
WASTE TONER SENSOR
l Is the WASTE TONER SENSOR functioning
properly? (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Go to FIP-2.17 "WASTE TONER
3 Replace the MCU PWB.
SENSOR is Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 21
Remedy
Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
OIL ROLL ASSY, CRU SWITCH ASSY, OIL CAM
ASSY
Check: CRU SWITCH ASSY
2 l Is the terminal in the CRU SWITCH ASSY properly Go to Step 3. Replace the defective part.
connected?
Check: CRU SWITCH ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the CRU SWITCH ASSY have continuity at the
3 point below? Go to Step 4. Replace the CRU SWITCH ASSY.
- Between the terminal in the CRU SWITCH ASSY
and P77
Check: OIL CAM ASSY
l Is the shaft in the OIL CAM ASSY bent?
4 Replace the OIL CAM ASSY. Go to Step 5.
l Is the pin in the OIL CAM ASSY at an incorrect
position?
Check: FUSER HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the FUSER HARNESS ASSY have proper
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the FUSER HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the point below?
- J71<=>J77
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the FUSER CONNECTOR.
continuity at the point below?
- P71<=>J19
Check: OIL ROLL ASSY
7 Replace the OIL ROLL ASSY. Replace the MCU PWB. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
Remedy
Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
TRAY N/P ACTUATOR, TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR,
MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Check the Controller PWB.
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. (10
2 Go to Step 3.
sheets for each of single and continuous print)
If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: BOTTOM PLATE ASSY
Remove the TURN IN CHUTE and insert the Replace the defective part, such as the
3 Go to Step 4.
UNIVERSAL CASSETTE. paper cassette.
l Does the BOTTOM PLATE ASSY properly lift up?
Check: TRAY N/P ACTUATOR
NOTE: Be sure to remove the MAIN P/H ASSY and
insert the Cassette 1 properly before the operation.
l Is the actuator properly functioning depending on the
conditions below?
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 5.
- Paper is set:
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
4 The TRAY N/P ACTUATOR is away from the Replace the defective part.
2.3 "TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR is
detection area of the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR.
Defective".
- No paper is set:
The TRAY N/P ACTUATOR is blocking the
detection area of the TRAY NO PAPER
SENSOR?
l Does the actuator move smoothly?
Check: TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR
l Is the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR functioning
Go to FIP-2.3 "TRAY NO PAPER
5 properly? (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Replace the MCU PWB.
SENSOR is Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 14
Remedy
Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
MSI LONG N/P SENSOR, MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR,
MCU PWB, MSI N/P ACTUATOR
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. (10 Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Run the test print again using LETTER size or smaller.
3 Go to Step 4. Go to Step 6.
l Are the outputs still abnormal?
Check: MSI N/P ACTUATOR
l Is the actuator functioning properly depending on the
conditions below?
- Paper is set: The MSI N/P ACTUATOR is away • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 7.
from the detection area of the MSI SHORT N/P • Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP- Replace the defective part, such as MSI
4
SENSOR. 2.7 "MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR is N/P ACTUATOR.
- No paper is set: The MSI N/P ACTUATOR is Defective".
blocking the detection area of the MSI SHORT N/P
SENSOR?
l Does the actuator move smoothly?
Check: MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR
l Is the MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR functioning Go to FIP-2.7 "MSI SHORT N/P
5 Replace the MCU PWB.
properly? (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) SENSOR is Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test, Device Code: 17
(To be continued)
(Continued)
Remedy
Check point
Yes No
MSI LONG N/P SENSOR installation
l Is the MSI N/P ACTUATOR properly functioning
depending on the conditions below? • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 7.
- Paper is set: The actuator is away from the • Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
6 Replace the defective part.
detection area of the MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR. 2.8 "MSI LONG N/P SENSOR is
- No paper is set: The actuator is blocking the Defective".
detection area of the MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR?
l Does the actuator move smoothly?
Check: MSI LONG N/P SENSOR
l Is the MSI LONG N/P SENSOR properly Go to FIP-2.8 "MSI LONG N/P SENSOR
7 Replace the MCU PWB.
functioning? (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) is Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test, Device Code: 18
Remedy
Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
DRUM CARTRIDGE, CRUM CONNECTOR ASSY,
MCU PWB
Check: CRUM CONNECTOR ASSY electrical
continuity
Replace the CRUM CONNECTOR
2 l Does the CRUM CONNECTOR ASSY have proper Go to Step 3.
ASSY.
continuity at the point below?
- J23<=>P22
Check: DRUM CARTRIDGE
3 Replace the DRUM CARTRIDGE with a specified one. Replace the MCU PWB. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
MSI LONG N/P SENSOR, MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR,
MCU PWB, MSI N/P ACTUATOR
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Check the Controller PWB.
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print)
If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
3 Is the current paper curled or easy to curl? Change the paper. Go to Step 4.
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 5.
Check: EXIT LOWER ASSY
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
4 l Is there any foreign matter or defective parts along Clean or replace the defective part.
2.32 "TOP EXIT SENSOR is
the paper path?
Defective".
Check: TOP EXIT SENSOR
l Is the TOP EXIT SENSOR functioning properly?
Go to FIP-2.32 "TOP EXIT SENSOR is
5 (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Go to Step 6.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 09
Check: EXIT-2 ROLL ASSY
Clean or replace the EXIT-2 ROLL
6 l Is there any worn-out area or foreign matter in the ASSY.
Go to Step 7.
EXIT-2 ROLL ASSY?
Check: EXIT LOWER ASSY for drive transmission
l Does the EXIT LOWER ASSY transmit drive
7 properly? Replace the defective part. Go to Step 8.
l Is there any damaged gear or worn-out area in the
EXIT LOWER ASSY?
Check: P/H DRIVE ASSY
Replace or reinstall the P/H DRIVE
8 l Is P/H DRIVE ASSY installed improperly? ASSY.
Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is any gear damaged?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 REGI. SENSOR, MAIN P/H ASSY, TURN ROLL ASSY, Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
FEED ROLL, P/H DRIVE ASSY, FEED SOLENOID,
MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Check the Controller PWB.
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print)
If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
3 l Is curled paper or paper that is easy to curl used? Change the paper. Go to Step 4.
Check: MAIN P/H ASSY • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 5.
4 l Is there any foreign matter or defective part along the • Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP- Clean or replace the defective part.
paper path in the MAIN P/H ASSY? 2.14 "REGI. SENSOR is Defective".
Check: REGI. SENSOR
l Is the REGI. SENSOR properly functioning? (Check
Go to FIP-2.14 "REGI. SENSOR is
5 it by using the diagnostic tool.) Go to Step 6.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 1F
Check: MAIN P/H ASSY for drive transmission
l Does the MAIN P/H ASSY transmit drive properly?
6 Replace the defective part. Go to Step 7.
l Is there any damaged gear or worn-out area in the
MAIN P/H ASSY?
Check: TURN ROLL ASSY
7 l Is there any worn-out area or foreign matter in the Clean or replace the TURN ROLL ASSY. Go to Step 8.
TURN ROLL ASSY?
Check: FEED ROLL
8 l Is there any worn-out area or foreign matter in the Clean or replace the FEED ROLL. Go to Step 9.
FEED ROLL?
Check: P/H DRIVE ASSY
Replace or reinstall the P/H DRIVE
9 l Is the P/H DRIVE ASSY installed improperly or is ASSY.
Go to Step 10.
any gear damaged?
Check: FEED SOLENOID Go to FIP-2.6 "FEED SOLENOID is
10 Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the FEED SOLENOID properly functioning? Defective".
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 FUSER EXIT ACTUATOR, FUSER EXIT SENSOR, Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
FUSER IN ACTUATOR, FUSER IN SENSOR, FUSER
DRIVE ASSY, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
3 Is the current paper curled or easy to curl? Change the paper. Go to Step 4.
Check: FUSER EXIT ACTUATOR
l Is the FUSER EXIT ACTUATOR properly functioning • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 5.
depending on the conditions below?
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
- Paper is set: 2.28 "FUSER EXIT SENSOR is
The actuator is away from the detection area of the
4 Defective". Replace the defective part.
FUSER EXIT SENSOR.
- No paper is set:
The MSI N/P ACTUATOR is blocking the detection If the problem still occurs, go to FIP-2.27
"FUSER IN SENSOR is Defective".
area of the FUSER EXIT SENSOR?
l Does the actuator move smoothly?
Check: FUSER EXIT SENSOR
l Is the FUSER EXIT SENSOR properly functioning? Go to FIP-2.28 "FUSER EXIT SENSOR
5 (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Go to Step 6.
is Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 25
(To be continued.)
(Continued)
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Check: FUSER IN ACTUATOR
l Is the FUSER IN ACTUATOR functioning properly
depending on the conditions below?
- Paper is set: • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 7.
The actuator is away from the detection area of the • Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
6 Replace the defective part.
FUSER IN SENSOR. 2.27 "FUSER IN SENSOR is
- No paper is set: Defective".
The MSI N/P ACTUATOR is blocking the detection
area of the FUSER IN SENSOR.
l Does the actuator move smoothly?
Check: FUSER IN SENSOR
l Is the FUSER IN SENSOR properly functioning? Go to FIP-2.27 "FUSER IN SENSOR is
7 (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Go to Step 8.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 28
Check: FUSER DRIVE ASSY
Replace or reinstall the FUSER DRIVE
8 l Is the FUSER DRIVE ASSY installed improperly? ASSY.
Go to Step 9.
l Is there any damaged gear?
Check: FUSER ASSY
9 Replace the FUSER ASSY. Replace the MCU PWB. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective
1 Go to Step 2.
SIZE SWITCH ASSY, MAIN P/H ASSY, REGI. SENSOR, part(s).
TRAY SIZE ACTUATOR, END GUIDE, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Check the Controller PWB.
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print)
If the problem still occur, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: Paper size
3 Go to Step 4. Use a specified size of paper.
l Does the size of the paper in use meet the specifications?
4 l Is the paper fed from the MSI tray? Go to Step 5. Go to Step 6.
Check: Setting size selected for the MSI
Match the sizes of the paper selected
5 l Does the paper size selected by the Diagnostic tool or Go to Step 8.
and set in the cassette.
controller PWB match the paper size in the MSI Tray?
Check: Paper size detection mechanism
l Is the combination of the On/Off setting of the paper size • With the diagnostic tool, go to step
switches on the SIZE SWITCH ASSY corresponding to the
7.
size of the paper in the paper cassette in use?
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to
- Check that the TRAY SIZE ACTUATOR move in
step 8.
6 accordance with the END GUIDE. Replace the defective part.
- Check that the TRAY SIZE ACTUATOR properly pushes
If the problem still occurs, go to FIP-
the Paper Size Switches.
2.5 "SIZE SWITCH ASSY is
NOTE: Insert a sheet of paper from the rear side onto the SIZE Defective".
SWITCH ASSY, then set the cassette and pull out the sheet. If
you feel resistance, it means the switches are pushed.
Check: Paper Size • With the diagnostic tool, go to step
l Is the output data corresponding to the size of the paper set 8.
Go to FIP-2.5 "SIZE SWITCH ASSY
7 in the paper cassette in use? • Without the diagnostic tool, go to
is Defective".
Diag Tool: Analog Input Test FIP-2.14 "REGI. SENSOR is
Device Code: 02 Defective".
Check: REGI. SENSOR
l Is the REGI. SENSOR properly functioning? (Check it by Go to FIP-2.14 "REGI. SENSOR is
8 Replace the MCU PWB.
using the diagnostic tool.) Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test, Device Code: 1F
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
FRONT OHP SENSOR, REAR OHP SENSOR, MCU
PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: White edge of the OHP sheet
3 l Is a break in the white edge of the OHP sheet Replace the OHP sheet. Go to Step 4.
smeared or lodged with any foreign matter?
Check: FRONT OHP SENSOR, REAR OHP SENSOR
4 l Is the surface of the FRONT OHP SENSOR or Remove the smear/ foreign matter.
Go to Step 5.
REAR OHP SENSOR smeared or lodged with any
foreign matter?
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 6.
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
Check: Paper path
Remove the smear/ foreign matter. 2.12 "FRONT OHP SENSOR is
5 l Is the paper path smeared or lodged with any foreign Defective".
matter?
If the problem still occurs, go to FIP-2.13
"REAR OHP SENSOR is Defective".
Check: FRONT OHP SENSOR
l Is the FRONT OHP SENSOR properly functioning?
Go to FIP-2.12 "FRONT OHP SENSOR
6 (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Go to Step 7.
is Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 1D
Check: REAR OHP SENSOR
l Is the REAR OHP SENSOR properly functioning?
Go to FIP-2.13 "REAR OHP SENSOR is
7 (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Replace the MCU PWB.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 1B
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
TOP EXIT SENSOR, MCU PWB
Check: TOP EXIT SENSOR for remainder
Remove the remaining paper, paper
2 l Is there any remaining paper, paper debris, or debris, or foreign matter.
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 3.
foreign matter on the TOP EXIT SENSOR?
Check: TOP EXIT SENSOR
l Is the TOP EXIT SENSOR properly functioning?
Go to FIP-2.32 "TOP EXIT SENSOR is
3 (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Replace the MCU PWB.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 09
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 FUSER EXIT ACTUATOR, FUSER EXIT SENSOR, Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
FUSER IN ACTUATOR, FUSER IN SENSOR, FUSER
DRIVE ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: REGI. SENSOR for remainder • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 3.
Remove the remaining paper, paper
2 l Is there any paper, paper debris, or foreign matter debris, or foreign matter.
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
remaining on the REGI. SENSOR? 2.14 "REGI. SENSOR is Defective".
Check: REGI. SENSOR
l Is the REGI. SENSOR properly functioning?
Go to FIP-2.14 "REGI. SENSOR is
3 (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Replace the MCU PWB.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 1F
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 FUSER EXIT ACTUATOR, FUSER EXIT SENSOR, Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
FUSER IN ACTUATOR, FUSER IN SENSOR, FUSER
DRIVE ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: FUSER EXIT SENSOR and FUSER IN
SENSOR for remainder Remove the remaining paper, paper
2 Go to step 3.
Is there any paper, paper debris, or foreign matter debris, or foreign matter.
remaining on the sensors?
Check: FUSER EXIT ACTUATOR
l Is the FUSER EXIT ACTUATOR properly functioning • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 4.
depending on the conditions below? • Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
- Paper set: The actuator is away from the detection 2.28 "FUSER EXIT SENSOR is
3 Replace the defective part.
area of the FUSER EXIT SENSOR. Defective".
- No paper is set: The actuator is blocking the If the problem still occurs, go to FIP-2.27
detection area of the FUSER EXIT SENSOR. "FUSER IN SENSOR is Defective"
l Does the actuator move smoothly?
Check: FUSER EXIT SENSOR
l Is the FUSER EXIT SENSOR functioning properly? Go to FIP-2.28 "FUSER EXIT SENSOR
4 Go to Step 5.
(Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) is Defective"
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test, Device Code: 25
Check: FUSER IN ACTUATOR
l Is the FUSER IN ACTUATOR properly functioning
depending on the conditions below? • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 6.
- Paper is set: The actuator is away from the • Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
5 Replace the defective part.
detection area of the FUSER IN SENSOR. 2.27 "FUSER IN SENSOR is
- No paper is set: The actuator is blocking the Defective".
detection area of the FUSER IN SENSOR.
l Does the actuator move smoothly?
Check: FUSER IN SENSOR
l Is the FUSER IN SENSOR functioning properly?
Go to FIP-2.27 "FUSER IN SENSOR is
6 (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Replace the MCU PWB.
Defective"
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 28
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
2ND BTR, BTR CAM SOLENOID, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
Are the outputs normal?
Check: 2ND BTR ASSY for its retract motion
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 9.
l Does the 2ND BTR ASSY retract properly during the
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
3 test print? Go to Step 4.
2.26 "BTR CAM SOLENOID is
NOTE: Inspect the BTR CAM SOLENOID’s action from Defective".
the rear.
Check: 2ND BTR CAM SOLENOID installation
4 Go to Step 5. Reinstall the BTR CAM SOLENOID.
l Is the BTR CAM SOLENOID properly installed?
Check: 2ND BTR CAM ASSY
5 Replace the 2ND BTR CAM ASSY. Go to Step 6.
Is the BTR CAM ASSY bent or deformed?
Check: 2ND BTR ASSY installation
6 Go to Step 7. Reinstall the 2ND BTR ASSY.
l Is the 2ND BTR ASSY properly installed?
Check: TRANSFER ASSY installation
7 Go to Step 8. Reinstall the TRANSFER ASSY.
l Is the TRANSFER ASSY properly installed?
Check: MCU PWB replacement
8 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to FIP-2.38 "HVPS is Defective". Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
Check: BTR CAM SOLENOID
l Is the BTR CAM SOLENOID properly functioning?
Go to FIP-2.26 "BTR CAM SOLENOID is
9 (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Replace the MCU PWB.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Output Test
Device Code: 2E
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 FUSER ASSY, MCU PWB, FUSER HARNESS ASSY, Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
FUSER CONNECTOR, FUSER ASSY, TEMP.
SENSOR ASSY, H/R HEATER,
P/R HEATER, LVPS, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: TEMP. SENSOR ASSY
Go to FIP-2.29 "TEMP. SENSOR
3 l Does the problem occur when the printer is turned ASSEMBLY is Defective".
Go to Step 4.
on?
Check: H/R HEATER, P/R HEATER
NOTE: Make sure the FUSER ASSY is cool before
4 starting this operation. Go to Step 5. Replace the H/R HEATER/P/R HEATER.
l Do the both H/R HEATER and P/R HEATER come
on when the printer is turned on?
Does the problem occur while the FUSER is warming Go to FIP-2.29 "TEMP. SENSOR
5 Go to Step 6.
up? ASSEMBLY is Defective".
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the point below?
- J21<=>J32
Check: LVPS
7 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 8. Replace the LVPS.
- P21-3PIN<=> P21-2PIN: 4.5VDC
Check: HEATER ROD for ON signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the
conditions below?
8 - Pins: P/J32-12PIN<=>P/J32-13PIN Replace the LVPS. Replace the MCU PWB.
- During FUSER’s warming-up: 0VDC
- At completion of FUSER’s warming-up:
Changes from 0VDC to 4.5VDC.
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
OIL ROLL ASSY, CRU SWITCH ASSY, FUSER
HARNESS ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: OIL ROLL ASSY installation
2 Install the OIL ROLL ASSY properly. Go to Step 3. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
Check: Conductive part in the OIL ROLL ASSY
3 l Is the conductive part (metal foil) in the OIL ROLL Replace the OIL ROLL ASSY. Go to Step 4.
ASSY damaged? (Check it visually.)
Check: Conductive part of the CRU SWITCH ASSY
4 l Are the conductive terminals in the CRU SWITCH Replace/Clean the CRU SWITCH ASSY. Go to Step 5.
ASSY smeared, dusty, or deformed?
Check: OIL ROLL ASSY electrical continuity
l Is continuity status correct depending on the
conditions below?
5 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 6.
- Pins: J19-17PIN<=> J19-18PIN
- OIL ROLL ASSY is installed: Detected
- OIL ROLL ASSY is not installed: Cut off
Check: FUSER HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the FUSER HARNESS ASSY have proper
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the FUSER HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J77<=>J71
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
7 Replace the MCU PWB. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J71<=>J19
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
FUSER ASSY, MCU PWB, FUSER HARNESS ASSY,
FUSER CONNECTOR
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: FUSER ASSY • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 4.
3 l Is the FUSER ASSY properly set? • Without the diagnostic tool, go to Replace the defective part.
(Check it by inserting and removing the FUSER ASSY.) step 5.
Check: FUSER ASSY detection circuit
l Is the FUSER ASSY detection circuit properly
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
functioning? (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.)
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test, Device Code: 24
Check: Power supply to the FUSER ASSY detection
circuit
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P19-16PIN<=>P19-15PIN: 5VDC
Check: FUSER ASSY detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
6 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 7.
- Pins: P/J19-16PIN<=>P/J19-15PIN
- FUSER ASSY is installed: 0VDC
- FUSER ASSY is not installed: 5VDC
Check: FUSER HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
7 l Does the FUSER HARNESS ASSY have proper Go to Step 8. Replace the FUSER HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at J71<=>J78?
Check: FUSER CONNECTOR electrical continuity
8 l Does the FUSER CONNECTOR have proper continuity Go to Step 9. Replace the FUSER CONNECTOR.
at P71<=>J19?
Check: FUSER ASSY replacement
9 Replace the FUSER ASSY. Replace the MCU PWB. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
TONER BOX SENSOR, TONER BOX HARNESS, MAIN
HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: WASTE TONER BOX installation Install the WASTE TONER BOX
2 Go to Step 3.
l Is the WASTE TONER BOX properly installed? properly.
Check: DRUM CARTRIDGE installation Install the DRAM CARTRIDGE
3 Go to Step 4.
l Is the DRUM CARTRIDGE properly installed? properly.
Check: CRUM CONNECTOR ASSY electrical
continuity
Replace the CRUM CONNECTOR
4 l Does the CRUM CONNECTOR ASSY have proper Go to Step 5.
ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J23<=>P22
Check: DRUM CARTRIDGE replacement
5 Replace the DRUM CARTRIDGE. Go to Step 6. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 7.
Check: TONER BOX SENSOR installation • Without the diagnostic tool, go to Install the TONER BOX SENSOR
6
l Is the TONER BOX SENSOR properly installed? FIP-2.18 "TONER BOX SENSOR is properly.
Defective".
Check: TONER BOX SENSOR
l Is the TONER BOX SENSOR properly functioning?
Go to FIP-2.18 "TONER BOX SENSOR
7 (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Replace the MCU PWB.
is Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 0D
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
Parts to inspect: MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: MCY PWB replacement
3 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to FIP-2.39 "Electrical Noise". Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 FUSER CONNECTOR, TEMP. SENSOR ASSY, H/R Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
HEATER, P/R HEATER, FUSER ASSY, MAIN HARNESS
ASSY, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: FUSER CONNECTOR
3 l Is the FUSER CONNECTOR securely connected when Go to Step 4. Check the FUSER CONNECTOR.
the FUSER ASSY is installed?
Check: TEMP. SENSOR ASSY Go to FIP-2.29 "TEMP. SENSOR
4 Go to Step 5.
l Does the problem occur when the printer is turned on? ASSEMBLY is Defective".
Check: H/R HEATER, P/R HEATER
NOTE: Make sure the FUSER ASSY is cool. Replace the H/R HEATER, P/R
5 Go to Step 6.
l Do the H/R HEATER and P/R HEATER come on when HEATER.
the printer is turned on?
l Does the problem occur while the FUSER is warming Go to FIP-2.29 "TEMP. SENSOR
6 Go to Step 7.
up? ASSEMBLY is Defective".
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY
7 l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper Go to Step 8. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at J21<=>J32?
Check: LVPS
8 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 9. Replace the LVPS.
- P21-3PIN<=> P21-2PIN: 4.5VDC
Check: HATER ROD for ON signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
9 - Pins: P/J32-12PIN<=>P/J32-13PIN Replace the LVPS. Replace the MCU PWB.
- FUSER is warming-up: 0VDC
- Warming up is completing: Changes from 0VDC to
4.5VDC
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
Parts to inspect: ROS ASSY, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Check the Controller PWB.
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Go to FIP-2.19 "ROS ASSY is
2 If the problem still occurs, go to FIP-
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) Defective".
2.19 "ROS ASSY is Defective".
l Are the outputs normal?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
PROCESS MOTOR ASSY, PROCESS WDD ASSY,
TRANSFER ASSY, TRO SENSOR, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: Process Motor rotation
3 Go to Step 4. Go to Step 9.
l Does the Process Motor rotate during the test print?
Check: PROCESS WDD ASSY Installation Install the PROCESS WDD ASSY
4 Go to Step 5.
l Is the PROCESS WDD ASSY securely installed? properly.
Check: TRANSFER ASSY installation
5 Go to Step 6. Install the TRANSFER ASSY properly.
l Is the TRANSFER ASSY securely installed?
Check: PROCESS WDD ASSY
Rotate the rotor of the PROCESS MOTOR ASSY.
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the PROCESS DRIVE ASSY.
l Does the output shaft smoothly rotate without any
irregular sound?
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 8.
Check: TRO SENSOR installation • Without the diagnostic tool, go to
7 Install the TRO SENSOR properly.
l Is the TRO SENSOR properly installed? FIP-2.25 "TRO SENSOR is
Defective".
Check: TRO SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.25 "TRO SENSOR is
8 l Is the TRO SENSOR properly functioning? Replace the MCU PWB.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test, Device code: 04
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step
Check: PROCESS MOTOR ASSY for foreign matter 10.
9 l Is any foreign matter interfering with rotation of the Remove the foreign matter. • Without the diagnostic tool, go to
PROCESS MOTOR ASSY? FIP-2.33 "PROCESS MOTOR ASSY
is Defective".
Check: PROCESS MOTOR ASSY
l Is the PROCESS MOTOR ASSY properly functioning? Go to FIP-2.33 "PROCESS MOTOR
10 Replace the MCU PWB.
(Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) ASSY is Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Output Test, Device Code: 10
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
Parts to inspect: COMMUNICATION ASSY, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY
3 l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have continuity Go to Step 4. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
between the COMMUNICATION ASSY and the MCU
PWB?
Check: COMMUNICATION ASSY replacement
4 Replace the COMMUNICATION ASSY. Go to Step 5. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
Check: MCU PWB replacement
Return the COMMUNICATION ASSY and replace the
5 Go to Step 6. Problem solved.
MCU PWB with a new MCU PWB (ASP).
l Does the problem still occur?
If any other error/status message
6 l Does the problem occur when the printer is turned on? Go to Step 7.
appears, go to the relevant FIP.
Replace the installed MCU PWB with another new one
7 (ASP) and then turn the printer back on. Go to Step 8. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
1. Replace the MCU PWB with the originally installed MCU
PWB.
2. Activate the Diagnostic commander and execute the
8 “Slave Initialize”. (Refer to Section 4.2.4.5.) Go to Step 9. Problem solved.
3. Execute the “NVM Write”. (Refer to Section 4.2.4.5.)
4. Turn the printer on.
l Does the problem occur when the printer is turned on?
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
9 Problem solved. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J16<=>J22
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
UNIVERSAL CASSETTE, TRAY SIZE ACTUATOR,
SIZE SWITCH ASSY, FEEDER PWB, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: UNIVERSAL CASSETTE
3 Go to Step 4.
Can you insert the UNIVERSAL CASSETTE smoothly?
Check: TRAY SIZE ACTUATOR
1. Insert a sheet of paper from the rear side onto the SIZE
SWITCH ASSY. • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 5.
2. Install the cassette 1. • Without the diagnostic tool, go to
4 Replace the defective part.
3. Pull out the sheet. If you feel resistance, it means the FIP-2.5 "SIZE SWITCH ASSY is
Paper Size Switches are pushed. Defective".
l Does the TRAY SIZE ACTUATOR push the Paper Size
Switches when the cassette 1is installed?
Check: Paper size • If the optional Large Capacity Paper
l Is the SIZE SWITCH ASSY functioning properly? Unit is installed, go to Step 6.
• Replace the MCU PWB. Go to FIP-2.5 "SIZE SWITCH ASSY is
5 Check the paper size using the diagnostic tool.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Analog Input Test
Device Code: 02
Check: FEEDER PWB replacement
6 Replace the FEEDER PWB with a good one. Replace the MCU PWB. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
DEVE.CONTACT ASSY, ADC SENSOR ASSY,
MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: DEVE. CONTACT ASSY Go to FIP-2.38 "HVPS is Defective"
3 l Is the contact surface of the DEVE. CONTACT ASSY Replace the DEVE.CONTACT ASSY. If the problem still occurs, go to FIP-
bent, deformed, or lodged with any foreign matter? 2.19 "ROS ASSY is Defective".
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 6. • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 5.
Check: ADC Sensor surface
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to • Without the diagnostic tool, go to
4 l Is the ADC Sensor surface smeared or lodged with any FIP-2.21 "ADC SOLENOID is FIP-2.20 "ADC SENSOR is
foreign matter?
Defective". Defective".
Check: ADC Sensor
l Is the ADC Sensor properly functioning? (Check it by
Go to FIP-2.20 "ADC SENSOR is
5 using the diagnostic tool.) Replace the MCU PWB.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 18, 33
Check: ADC Solenoid
l Is the ADC Solenoid properly functioning? (Check it by
using the diagnostic tool.) Go to FIP-2.21 "ADC SOLENOID is
6 Go to Step 7.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Output Test
Device Code: 36
Check: MCU PWB replacement
7 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to FIP-2.38 "HVPS is Defective". Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
DISPENSE MOTOR ASSY, DEVE CONTACT ASSY,
Developer Assy, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: Image on the Drum surface
l Is the toner image of each color properly developed?
3 NOTE: During printing, turn the printer off when transfer is Go to Step 8. Go to Step 4.
assumed to process; and check for Cin50% on the drum
surface visually.
Check: Image on the Drum surface
l Are the image densities of all colors on the drum low?
4 NOTE: During printing, turn the printer off when transfer is Go to Step 5. Go to Step 11.
assumed to process; and check for Cin50% on the drum
surface visually.
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 6.
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to
Check: Dispense Motor installation Install the DISPENSE MOTOR ASSY
5 FIP-2.36 "DISPENSE MOTOR
l Is the Dispense Motor properly installed? ASSY is Defective".
properly.
(To be continued)
(Continued)
FIP-1.27 "Low Density Error"
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 9.
Check: ADC Sensor surface 10.
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to
8 l Is the ADC Sensor surface smeared or lodged with any • Without the diagnostic tool, go to
FIP-2.20 "ADC SENSOR is
foreign matter? FIP-2.21 "ADC SOLENOID is
Defective".
Defective".
Check: ADC Sensor
l Is the ADC Sensor properly functioning? (Check it by
Go to FIP-2.20 "ADC SENSOR is
9 using the diagnostic tool.) Replace the MCU PWB.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Output Test
Device Code: 18,33
Check: ADC Solenoid
l Is the ADC Solenoid properly functioning? Go to FIP-2.21 "ADC SOLENOID is
10 Replace the MCU PWB.
Diag Tool: Digital Output Test Defective".
Device Code: 36
Check: Developer Assy replacement
11 l Does the problem still occur when the Developer Assy Replace the MCU PWB. Problem solved.
corresponding to the color is replaced?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
P/H MOTOR ASSY, HEAT ROLL, PRESSURE ROLL,
1 FUSER ASSY, BELT CLEANER ASSY, EXIT LOWER Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
ASSY, FEED ROLL ASSY, MAIN P/H ASSY, WASTE
TONER BOX, 2ND BTR CAM ASSY, AUGER HIGH
ASSY, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: P/H Motor rotation
3 l Does the P/H Motor rotate slightly and then stops Go to Step 5. Go to Step 4.
during the test print?
Check: P/H Motor rotation Go to FIP-2.34 "P/H MOTOR ASSY is
4 Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the P/H Motor motionless at all during the test print? Defective".
Check: Drive transmission
Rotate the rotor in the P/H MOTOR ASSY manually
Go to FIP-2.34 "P/H MOTOR ASSY is
5 counterclockwise. Go to Step 6.
Defective".
l Does the rotor in the P/H MOTOR ASSY rotate
smoothly?
Check: FUSER ASSY
Rotate the INPUT GEAR FT1 manually.
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the interfering part.
l Do the HEAT ROLL and PRESSURE ROLL rotate
smoothly?
Check: BELT CLEANER ASSY
7 Turn the gear manually. Go to Step 8. Replace the BELT CLEANER ASSY.
l Does the BELT CLEANER ASSY rotate smoothly?
(To be continued.)
(Continued)
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Check: EXIT LOWER ASSY
8 Rotate the EXIT IDLER GEAR manually. Go to Step 9. Replace the interfering part.
l Does the EXIT LOWER ASSY rotate smoothly?
Check: MAIN P/H ASSY
9 Rotate the PRE-REGI. KNOB ASSY manually. Go to Step 10 Replace the interfering part.
l Does the MAIN P/H ASSY rotate smoothly?
Check: WASTE TONER BOX
1. Remove the WASTE TONER BOX.
2. Rotate the rotor in the P/H MOTOR ASSY
10 Go to Step 11. Replace the WASTE TONER BOX.
counterclockwise manually.
l Does the rotor in the P/H MOTOR ASSY rotate
smoothly?
Check: FEED ROLL ASSY
1. Push down the FEED SOLENOID arm.
2. Mesh the gears.
11 Go to Step 12. Replace the interfering part.
3. Manually rotate the rotor in the P/H MOTOR ASSY
counterclockwise.
l Dose the FEED ROLL ASSY rotate smoothly?
Check: 2ND BTR CAM ASSY
1. Remove the FUSER ASSY, BELT CLEANER ASSY,
and 2ND BTR ASSY.
12 Go to Step 13. Replace the interfering part.
2. Manually rotate the rotor in the P/H MOTOR ASSY
counterclockwise.
l Does the BTR CAM ASSY rotate smoothly?
Check: AUGER HIGH ASSY
1. Remove the FUSER ASSY, BELT CLEANER ASSY,
and 2ND BTR ASSY.
13 Replace the MCU PWB. Replace the AUGER HIGH ASSY.
2. Manually rotate the rotor in the P/H MOTOR ASSY
counterclockwise.
l Does the AUGER HIGH ASSY rotate smoothly?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 2.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace the defective part. • Without the diagnostic tool, go to
ENVIRONMENT SENSOR, P/H HARNESS ASSY,
step 3.
MCU PWB
Check: ENVIRONMENT SENSOR
l Is the ENVIRONMENT SENSOR properly functioning?
2 (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 3.
Diag Tool: Analog Input Test
Device Code: 04
Check: ENVIRONMENT SENSOR resistance
l Does the thermistor have proper resistance at the pins
below? Replace the ENVIRONMENT
3 Go to Step 4.
- J105-1PIN<=>J105-2PIN: 5 kΩ SENSOR.
NOTE: Measure the resistance at the room temperature
18 to 20 °C.
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- J71<=>J105
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
ROTARY MOTOR ASSY, ROTARY FRAME ASSY,
ROTARY SENSOR ASSY, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: Rotary Motor
3 Run the test print. Go to Step 4. Go to Step 8.
l Does the Rotary Motor rotate?
Check: ROTARY FRAME ASSY rotation
4 l Is anything interfering with rotation of the ROTARY Remove the interfering matter. Go to Step 5.
FRAME ASSY?
Check: ROTARY SENSOR ASSY installation Install the ROTARY SENSOR ASSY
5 Go to Step 6.
l Is the ROTARY SENSOR ASSY properly installed? properly.
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 7.
Check: ROTARY MOTOR ASSY installation • Without the diagnostic tool, go to Install the ROTARY MOTOR ASSY
6
l Is the ROTARY MOTOR ASSY properly installed? FIP-2.24 "ROTARY SENSOR is properly.
Defective".
Check: ROTARY SENSOR ASSY
l Is the ROTARY SENSOR ASSY properly functioning? Go to FIP-2.24 "ROTARY SENSOR is
7 Replace the MCU PWB.
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test Defective".
Device code: 05
With the diagnostic tool, go to step 9.
Check: ROTARY FRAME ASSY
Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
8 l Is anything interfering with rotation of the ROTARY Remove the foreign matter.
2.35 "ROTARY MOTOR ASSY is
FRAME ASSY?
Defective".
Check: ROTARY MOTOR ASSY
l Is the ROTARY MOTOR ASSY properly functioning? Go to FIP-2.35 "ROTARY MOTOR
9 Replace the MCU PWB.
Diag Tool: Digital Output Test ASSY is Defective".
Device code: 16
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 WASTE TONER BOX, DRAM CARTRIDGE, TONER BOX Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
SENSOR, TONER BOX HARNESS, MAIN HARNESS
ASSY, MCU PWB
2 l Is the WASTE TONER BOX securely set? Go to Step 3. Set the WASTE TONER BOX securely.
Check: DRAM CARTRIDGE
3 Go to Step 4. Set the DRAM CARTRIDGE securely.
l Is the DRAM CARTRIDGE securely set?
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 5.
Check: TONER BOX SENSOR installation • Without the diagnostic tool, go to Install the TONER BOX SENSOR
4
l Is the TONER BOX SENSOR properly installed? FIP-2.18 "TONER BOX SENSOR is properly.
Defective".
Check: TONER BOX SENSOR
l Is the TONER BOX SENSOR properly functioning? Go to FIP-2.18 "TONER BOX SENSOR
5 Replace the MCU PWB.
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test is Defective".
Device code: 12
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
COMMUNICATION ASSY, MCU PWB
l Does the problem occur the instance the printer is If another error/status message
2 Go to Step 3.
turned on? appears, go to the relevant FIP.
Replace the MCU PWB and turn the printer back on.
3 Go to FIP-2.39 "Electrical Noise". *1 Problem solved. *2
l Does the problem still occur?
*1: Take this step first though some external cause can be considered.
*2: If the problem still occurs after replacing the MCU PWB, go to FIP-2.39 "Electrical Noise".
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
Toner Cartridge, CARTRIDGE SENSOR, MCU PWB
Check: Sticker on a Toner Cartridge
2 l Is a white reflective sticker attached to the relevant Go to Step 3. Replace the relevant Toner Cartridge.
Toner Cartridge?
Check: CARTRIDGE SENSOR installation Install the CARTRIDGE SENSOR
3 Go to Step 4.
l Is the CARTRIDGE SENSOR properly installed? properly.
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 5.
Check: Toner Cartridge replacement
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to
4 Replace the relevant Toner Cartridge with a new one. Problem solved.
FIP-2.22 "CARTRIDGE SENSOR is
l Does the problem still occur? Defective".
Check: CARTRIDGE SENSOR
l Is the CARTRIDGE SENSOR properly functioning? Go to FIP-2.22 "CARTRIDGE SENSOR
5 Replace the MCU PWB.
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test is Defective".
Device code: 0D
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
Parts to inspect: MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: MCU PWB replacement
3 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to FIP-2.39 "Electrical Noise". Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
ADC SENSOR ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY,
MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 6.
Check: ADC Sensor surface
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to
3 l Is the ADC Sensor surface smeared or lodged with any FIP-2.21 "ADC SOLENOID is
Go to Step 4.
foreign matter?
Defective".
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 5.
Check: ADC SENSOR ASSY installation • Without the diagnostic tool, go to Install the ADC SENSOR ASSY
4
l Is the ADC SENSOR ASSY properly installed? FIP-2.20 "ADC SENSOR is properly.
Defective".
Check: ADC Sensor
l Is the ADC Sensor properly functioning? Go to FIP-2.20 "ADC SENSOR is
5 Replace the MCU PWB.
Diag Tool: Digital Output Test Defective".
Device code: 18, 33
Check: ADC Solenoid
l Is the ADC Solenoid properly functioning? Go to FIP-2.21 "ADC SOLENOID is
6 Replace the MCU PWB.
Diag Tool: Digital Output Test Defective".
Device code: 36
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
Parts to inspect: MCU PWB
Check: Error Reset
In the Maintenance menu, perform the required counter
reset:
- 2nd BTR Reset
2 Go to Step 3. Problem solved.
- Fuser Unit Reset
- IBT Cleaner Reset
(Refer to Chapter 6.)
l Does the problem still occur after “Error Reset”?
Replace the relevant part.
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the relevant part.
l Does the problem still occur?
4 l Does the problem occur when the printer is turned on? Go to Step 7. Go to Step 5.
l Does the problem still occur when the printer is turned
5 Go to Step 7. Go to Step 6.
on again?
l Does the problem occur when the printer is turned off
6 Go to Step 7. Go to FIP-2.39 "Electrical Noise"
and on repeatedly?
Check: MCU PWB replacement
7 Replace the MCU PWB. Replace the MCU PWB. Check the Controller PWB.
l Does the problem still occur?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
P/H HARNESS ASSY, REGI. HARNESS ASSY, MAIN
HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Controller PWB for power supply voltage
1. Remove the Controller PWB and turn the printer on
after a few minutes.
2. Measure the voltage at the pins below to confirm that
there is no electrical shortage: Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
• P33-6PIN<=>P33-8PIN: 5VDC If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
• P33-5PIN<=>P33-7PIN: 5VDC
• P33-3PIN<=>P33-4PIN: 5VDC
l Is there electrical shortage in any part?
Check: Power supply voltage for short-circuited parts
1. Disconnect any connector but J12 and J21 and turn the
printer on.
2. After a few minutes, measure the voltage at the pins
below:
3 • P33-6PIN<=>P33-8PIN: 5VDC Replace the short-circuited part. Replace the MCU PWB.
• P33-5PIN<=>P33-7PIN: 5VDC
• P33-3PIN<=>P33-4PIN: 5VDC
3. Repeat the steps 1 and 2 until all connectors except for
J12 and J21 are removed.
l Is there electrical shortage in any part?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
LVPS, HVPS, MCU PWB
2 Does the printer exhibit any print motion at all? Go to Step 4. Go to Step 3.
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Replace the Controller PWB. If the Check the Controller PWB.
3
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) problem still occurs, go to step 4. If the problem still occurs, go to Step 4.
l Are the outputs normal?
4 l Does the printer enter reset condition during printing? Go to FIP-2.39 "Electrical Noise". Go to Step 5.
Check: Interface cable
5 Replace the interface cable. Go to Step 6. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
Check: MCU PWB replacement
6 Replace the MCU PWB. Check the host computer. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection below.
• Remove all optional electrical unit modules to return the
1 printer to the standard condition. Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
• Check that all connectors are properly connected to the
CONTROLLER PWB.
Updating the CONTROLLER PWB environment
2 Update the DIMM with the latest program. Replace/reinstall the defective part. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection below:
• Remove all optional electrical unit modules to return the
1 printer to the standard condition. Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
• Check that all connectors are properly connected to the
CONTROLLER PWB.
Check: DIMM
Format the DIMM and write the control program to the
DIMM.
2 Replace/reinstall the defective part. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
NOTE: Verify the correct direction for setting the DIMM;
and install it to the socket P until it is locked securely.
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection below:
• Remove all optional electrical unit modules to return the
1 printer to the standard condition. Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
• Check that all connectors are properly connected to the
CONTROLLER PWB.
Check: SD-RAM
1. Remove all SD-RAMs from the RAM slots 0, 1, and 2.
2. Check that the printer is turned off.
3. Install a SD-RAM to slot 1 and turn the printer on.
4. Repeat the steps 2 and 3 to add other SD RAMs one by
one to the slot 1 and 2.
2 l Is there any defective SD-RAM? Replace/reinstall the defective part. Problem solved.
NOTE:
• Be sure to install a SD-RAM whose memory is more
than 32MB in the slot 0.
• Before reinstalling each SD-RAM, verify the correct
direction for installing it; and insert it to the socket until it
is locked.
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection below:
• Remove all electrical unit modules to return the printer
1 to the standard condition. Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
• Check that all connectors are properly connected to the
CONTROLLER PWB.
Check: Defective IC
Replace the IC according to the error type as follows:
- Error C1100: Replace the IC9.
2 Replace/reinstall the defective part. Problem solved.
- Error C1101: Replace IC8.
- Other error code: replace the CONTROLLER PWB.
l Does the problem still occur?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection below:
• Remove all electrical unit modules to return the printer
1 to the standard condition. Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
• Check that all connectors are properly connected to the
CONTROLLER PWB.
Check: Relevant unit replacement
Replace the DIMM as described below:
2 • Format the current DIMM and load the latest program. Replace the CONTROLLER PWB. Problem solved.
• Format a new DIMM and load the latest program.
l Does the problem still occur?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection below:
• Remove all electrical unit modules to return the printer
1 to the standard condition. Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
• Check that all connectors are properly connected to the
CONTROLLER PWB.
Check: DIMM
Does the current DIMM meet the specifications?
2 NOTE: Be sure to check the correct direction for Replace the CONTROLLER PWB. Problem solved.
installing the DIMM before installing it.
l Does the problem still occur?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection below:
• Remove all electrical unit modules to return the printer
1 to the standard condition. Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
• Check that all connectors are properly connected to the
CONTROLLER PWB.
Check: IC15
- Error C1200: Replace the IC15.
2 Replace the CONTROLLER PWB. Problem solved.
- Error C1210: Replace the IC15.
l Does the problem still occur?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection below:
• Remove all electrical unit modules to return the printer
1 to the standard condition. Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
• Check that all connectors are properly connected to the
CONTROLLER PWB.
Check: IC replacement
Replace the relevant IC according to the error code.
2 - Error C1500: Replace the IC22. Replace the CONTROLLER PWB. Problem solved.
- Error C1600: Replace the IC23.
l Does the problem still occur?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection below:
• Remove all electrical unit modules to return the printer
1 to the standard condition. Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
• Check that all connectors are properly connected to the
CONTROLLER PWB.
Check: CONTROLLER PWB replacement
2 Replace the CONTROLLER PWB. - Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
FRONT COVER SWITCH R, FRONT COVER SWITCH L,
MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: FRONT COVER SWITCH L for its pushing
motion
l Is the actuator in the FRONT COVER ASSY functioning • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 4.
properly as follows?
3 • Without the diagnostic tool, go to Replace the defective part.
- FRONT COVER ASSY is closed:
step 5.
Turns on the FRONT COVER SWITCH L.
- FRONT COVER ASSY is open:
Turns off the FRONT COVER SWITCH L.
Check: FRONT COVER SWITCH L
l Is the FRONT COVER SWITCH L properly functioning?
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device code: 27
Check:
Power supply to the FRONT COVER SWITCH L Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
5 Go to Step 6.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Defective".
- P19-2PIN<=>P19-3PIN: 5VDC
Check: FRONT COVER for the detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
6 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 7.
- Pins: P19-2PIN<=>P19-3PIN
- FRONT COVER ASSY is closed: 0VDC
- FRONT COVER ASSY is open: 5VDC
Check: MSI HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MSI HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity Replace the FRONT COVER SWITCH
7 Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below? L.
- J19<=>P197
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
MAIN P/H ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 4.
Check: MAIN P/H ASSY insertion
3 • Without the diagnostic tool, go to Replace the interfering part.
Is the MAIN P/H ASSY properly inserted?
step 5.
Check: MAIN P/H ASSY detection
l Is the MAIN P/H ASSY detection mechanism properly
4 functioning? Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device code: 20
Check: Power supply to the MAIN P/H ASSY
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
5 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 6.
Defective".
- P20-30PIN<=>P20-31PIN: 5VDC
Check: MAIN P/H ASSY detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
6 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 7.
- Pins: P20-30PIN<=>P20-31PIN
- MAIN P/H ASSY is installed: 0VDC
- MAIN P/H ASSY is not installed: 5VDC
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
7 Replace the MAIN P/H ASSY. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- J20<=>P91
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
MAIN P/H ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: EXIT CHUTE SWITCH’s pushing motion
l Is the actuator in the EXIT UPPER ASSY properly
functioning depending on the conditions below? • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 4.
3 - EXIT UPPER ASSY is closed: • Without the diagnostic tool, go to Replace the defective part.
Turns the EXIT CHUTE SWITCH ON. step 5.
- EXIT UPPER ASSY is open:
Turns the EXIT CHUTE SWITCH OFF.
Check: EXIT CHUTE SWITCH
l Is the EXIT CHUTE SWITCH properly functioning?
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device code: 0B
Check: Power supply to the EXIT CHUTE SWITCH
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
5 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 6.
Defective".
- P17-10PIN<=>P17-11PIN: 5VDC
Check: EXIT CHUTE SWITCH for signals
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
6 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 7.
- Pins: P17-10PIN<=>P17-11PIN
- EXIT UPPER ASSY is closed: 0VDC
- EXIT UPPER ASSY is open: 5VDC
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
7 Replace the EXIT CHUTE SWITCH. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J17<=>P161
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
MAIN FUSER ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 4.
Check: MAIN FUSER ASSY insertion
3 • Without the diagnostic tool, go to Replace the interfering part.
l Is the MAIN FUSER ASSY securely inserted? step 5.
Check: MAIN FUSER ASSY detection
l Is the MAIN FUSER ASSY detection mechanism
4 properly functioning? Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device code: 24
Check: Power supply to the MAIN FUSER ASSY
5 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 6. Go to "".
- P19-16PIN<=>P19-15PIN: 5VDC
Check: MAIN FUSER ASSY detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
6 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 7.
- Pins: P19-16PIN<=>P19-15PIN
- MAIN FUSER ASSY is installed: 0VDC
- MAIN FUSER ASSY is not installed: 5VDC
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
7 Replace the MAIN FUSER ASSY. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- J19<=>P71
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
UNIVERSAL CASSETTE, BOTTOM PLATE ASSY, LOW
PAPER SENSOR, FEEDER PWB, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: UNIVERSAL CASSETTE
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the defective part.
Is the UNIVERSAL CASSETTE smoothly inserted?
Check: BOTTOM PLATE ASSY
Remove the TURN IN CHUTE-3T and then insert the
4 UNIVERSAL CASSETTE. Go to Step 5. Replace the defective part.
l Does the BOTTOM PLATE ASSY properly lift up when
the UNIVERSAL CASSETTE is inserted?
With the diagnostic tool, go to step 6.
Check: LOW PAPER SENSOR installation Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP- Install the LOW PAPER SENSOR
5
l Is the LOW PAPER SENSOR properly installed? 2.4 "LOW PAPER SENSOR is properly.
Defective".
Check: LOW PAPER SENSOR
l Is the LOW PAPER SENSOR properly functioning? Go to FIP-2.4 "LOW PAPER SENSOR
6 Go to Step 7.
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test is Defective".
Device code: 13
Check: FEEDER PWB
7 Replace the FEEDER PWB. Replace the MCU PWB. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
C H E C K <Preliminary inspection>
P O IN T
In each FIP, you are required to perform the
“Preliminary inspection” prior to any other actions.
The Preliminary inspection involves the following:
n Check for any part that does not meet the
specifications.
n Check if any part has been installed improperly.
n Check for part that is damaged, deformed, smeared,
or lodged with foreign matter.
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
LVPS, MCU PWB, MAIN HARNESS ASSY
l Check: LVPS
Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
2 - P33-6PIN<=>P33-8PIN: 5VDC Go to Step 3. Replace the LVPS.
- P33-5PIN<=>P33-7PIN: 5VDC
- P33-3PIN<=>P33-4PIN: 5VDC
l Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity at
3 Replace the MCU PWB. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
the pins below?
- J33<=>J12
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 LVPS, MCU PWB, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, FUSER ASSY, Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
MAIN P/H ASSY, FRONT COVER SWITCH R, P/H
HARNESS ASSY, FUSER CONNECTOR
Check: LVPS
2 Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3. Replace the LVPS.
- P32-11PIN<=>P32-12PIN: 24VDC
Check: Interlock path
Close the FUSER ASSY, MAIN P/H ASSY, and FRONT
3 COVER ASSY. Go to Step 4. Go to Step 6.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P32-6PIN<=>P32-12PIN: 24VDC
Check: LVPS relay circuit
Close the FUSER ASSY, MAIN P/H ASSY, and FRONT
4 COVER ASSY. Go to Step 5. Replace the LVPS.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P32-11PIN<=>P32-12PIN: 24VDC
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
5 Replace the MCU PWB. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- J32<=>J21
Check: FUSER ASSY installation/removal
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the interfering part.
l Is the FUSER ASSY securely set?
Check: MAIN P/H ASSY installation/removal
7 Go to Step 8. Replace the interfering part.
l Is the MAIN P/H ASSY securely set?
Check: Power supply to the FRONT COVER SWITCH R
8 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 9. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
- J192-1PIN<=>P32-12PIN: 24VDC
(To be continued.)
(Continued)
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Check: FRONT COVER SWITCH R
Close the FRONT COVER ASSY. Replace the FRONT COVER
9 Go to Step 10.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? SWITCH R.
- P/J191-1PIN<=>P32-12PIN: 24VDC
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY
Close the FRONT COVER ASSY.
10 l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity Go to Step 11. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- P97-1PIN<=>P32-12PIN
Check: Power supply to the P/H ASSY
Close the FUSER ASSY, FRONT COVER ASSY, and TOP
11 COVER ASSY. Go to Step 12. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P91-1PIN<=>P32-12PIN: 24VDC
Check: Power supply to the FUSER ASSY
Close the MAIN P/H ASSY and FRONT COVER ASSY.
12 Go to Step 13. Go to Step 16.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P71-3PIN<=>P32-12PIN: 24VDC
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY
Close the MAIN P/H ASSY, FUSER ASSY, and FRONT
13 COVER ASSY. Go to Step 15. Go to Step 14.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- J70-2PIN<=>P32-12PIN: 24VDC
Check: MCU PWB
Close the MAIN P/H ASSY, FUSER ASSY, and FRONT
14 COVER ASSY. Replace the MCU PWB. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P/J32-6PIN<=>P/J32-12PIN: 24VDC
(To be continued)
(Continued)
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Check: FUSER ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the FUSER ASSY have proper continuity at the pins
15 Replace the FUSER CONNECTOR. Replace the FUSER ASSY.
below?
- J71-3PIN<=>J71-4PIN
Check: MAIN P/H ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN P/H ASSY have proper continuity at the
16 Go to Step 17. Replace the MAIN P/H ASSY.
pins below?
- J91-1PIN<=>J91-2PIN
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity at
17 Go to Step 18. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
the pins below?
- P91-1PIN<=>J97-2PIN
Check: FUSER CONNECTOR electrical continuity
l Does the FUSER CONNECTOR have proper continuity at
18 Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY. Replace the FUSER CONNECTOR.
the pins below?
- P91-1PIN<=>J70-2PIN
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR, REGI. HARNESS ASSY,
TRAY N/P HARNESS, MCU PWB
Check:
Power supply to the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 Go to Step 3.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Defective".
- P20-15PIN<=>P20-16PIN: 5VDC
Check:
Power supply to the TRAY NO PAPER detection signal
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P20-17PIN<=>P20-16PIN: 5VDC
Check: TRAY NO PAPER detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
- Pins: P/J20-17PIN<=>P/J20-16PIN
- Passed (paper is set): 0VDC
- Blocked (no paper is set): 5VDC
Check: TRAY N/P HARNESS electrical continuity
l Does the TRAY N/P HARNESS have proper continuity
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the TRAY N/P HARNESS.
at the pins below?
- J107<=>P101
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity at Replace the TRAY NO PAPER
6 Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
the pins below? SENSOR.
- J101<=>J20
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
LOW PAPER SENSOR, TRAY N/P HARNESS,
MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to LOW PAPER detection signal
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3. Replace the MCU PWB.
- P20-18PIN<=>P20-19PIN: 5VDC
Check: LOW PAPER detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
3 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 4.
- Pins: P/J20-18PIN<=>P/J20-19PIN
- 20 sheets of paper are set: 0VDC
- 200 sheets of paper are set: 5VDC
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity Replace the LOW PAPER SENSOR
4 Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below? ASSY.
- J107<=>P101
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
SIZE SWITCH ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the SIZE SWITCH ASSY
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P19-27PIN<=>P19-26PIN: 5VDC
Check: REGI. detection signal
l Is the correct voltage output at the pins below
depending on the paper size?
3 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 4.
- Pins: P/J19-28PIN<=>P/J19-26PIN
NOTE: For the correct voltages, refer to Chapter 2/Section
2.7.1 “Paper Size Control”.
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
4 Replace the SIZE SWITCH ASSY. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J102<=>J19
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
FEED SOLENOID, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the FEED SOLENOID
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P/J19-29PIN<=>P/J21-2PIN: 24VDC
Check: FEED SOLENOID
l Does the FEED SOLENOID have proper continuity at
3 the pins below? Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 4.
- Pins: J19-29PIN<=>J19-30PIN
- Resistance: 90Ω
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
4 Replace the FEED SOLENOID. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J19<=> J103PIN
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR, MSI HARNESS ASSY, REGI.
HARNESS ASSY, P/H HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: MSI SHORT N/P detection signal
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P20-32PIN<=>P20-33PIN: 5VDC
Check:
Power supply to the MSI SHORT N/P detection signal
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P20-34PIN<=>P20-33PIN: 5VDC
Check: MSI SHORT N/P detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
- Pins: P/J20-34PIN<=>P/J20-33PIN
- Passed condition (paper is set): 0VDC
- Blocked condition (no paper is set): 5VDC
Check: MSI HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MSI HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the MSI HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- J203<=>P113
Check: REGI. HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the REGI. HARNESS ASSY have proper
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the REGI. HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J113<=>J91
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity Replace the MSI SHORT N/P
7 Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below? SENSOR.
- P91<=>J20
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
MSI LONG N/P SENSOR, MSI HARNESS ASSY, REGI.
HARNESS ASSY, P/H HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the MSI LONG N/P SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P20-11PIN<=>P20-13PIN: 5VDC
Check:
Power supply to the MSI LONG N/P detection signal
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P20-14PIN<=>P20-13PIN: 5VDC
Check: MSI LONG N/Pdetection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
4 Replace the MCU PWB Go to Step 5.
- Pins: P/J20-14PIN<=>P/J20-13PIN
- Reflecting condition (paper is set): 0VDC
- Unreflecting condition (no paper is set): 5VDC
Check: MSI HARNESS ASSY
l Does the MSI HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the MSI HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- J206<=>P92
Check: REGI. HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the REGI. HARNESS ASSY have proper
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the REGI. HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J92<=>J91
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
7 Replace the MSI LONG N/P SENSOR. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- 91<=>J20
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
MSI EDGE SENSOR, MSI HARNESS ASSY, REGI.
HARNESS ASSY, P/H HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the MSI EDGE SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P20-11PIN<=>P20-13PIN: 5VDC
Check:
Power supply to the MSI EDGE detection signal
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P20-10PIN<=>P20-13PIN: 5VDC
Check: MSI EDGE detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
- Pins: P/J20-10PIN<=>P/J20-13PIN
- Reflecting condition (paper is set): 0VDC
- Unreflecting condition (no paper is set): 5VDC
Check: MSI HARNESS ASSY
Does the MSI HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity at
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the MSI HARNESS ASSY.
the pins below?
- J204<=>P92
Check: REGI. HARNESS ASSY
Does the REGI. HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the REGI. HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- J92<=>J91
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY
Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity at
7 Replace the MSI EDGE SENSOR. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
the pins below?
- P91<=>J20
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
MSI CLUTCH, P/H HARNESS ASSY, REGI. MAIN
HARNESS, MSI HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the MSI CLUTCH
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P/J20-36PIN< =>P/J20-35PIN: 24VDC
Check: MSI CLUTCH
l Does the MSI CLUTCH have proper continuity at the
3 pins below? Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 4.
- Pins: J20-36PIN<=>J20-35PIN
- Resistance: 169 Ω
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
4 Go to Step 5. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- Pins: J20<=>P91
Check: REGI. HARNESS
l Does the REGI. HARNESS have proper continuity at
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the REGI. HARNESS.
the pins below?
- Pins: J91<=>J113PIN
Check: MSI HARNESS ASSY
l Does the MSI HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
6 Replace the MSI CLUTCH. Replace the MSI HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- Pins: P113<=>J202
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
PICK UP SOLENOID, P/H HARNESS ASSY, REGI. MAIN
HARNESS, MSI HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the PICK UP SOLENOID
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P/J20-37PIN<=>P/J20-38PIN: 24VDC
Check: PICK UP SOLENOID
l Is proper resistance output at the pins below?
3 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 4.
- Pins: J20-37PIN<=>J20-38PIN
- Resistance: 89Ω
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
4 Go to Step 5. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- Pins: J20<=>P91
Check: REGI. MAIN HARNESS
l Does the REGI. MAIN HARNESS have proper
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the REGI. MAIN HARNESS.
continuity at the pins below?
- J91<=>J113
Check: MSI HARNESS ASSY
l Does the MSI HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
6 Replace the PICK UP SOLENOID. Replace the MSI HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- P113<=>J201
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to check:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
FRONT OHP SENSOR, REGI. HARNESS ASSY, P/H
HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the FRONT OHP SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P20-6PIN<=>P20-4PIN: 5VDC
Check:
Power supply to the FRONT OHP detection signal
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P20-5PIN<=>P20-4PIN: 5VDC
Check: FRONT OHP detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
- Pins: P/J20-5PIN<=>P/J20-4PIN
4 - Photo reflecting status (paper is set): 0VDC Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
- Photo unreflecting status (no paper is set): 5VDC
NOTE: When setting the conditions, reflecting and
unreflecting, use white paper, not OHP sheet. Use of OHP
sheet causes failure in judgement since it is transparent.
Check: REGI. HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the REGI. HARNESS ASSY have proper
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the REGI. HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J98<=>J91
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
6 Replace the FRONT OHP SENSOR. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- P91<=>J20
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
REAR OHP SENSOR, REGI. HARNESS ASSY, P/H
HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the REAR OHP SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
P20-9PIN<=>P20-7PIN: 5VDC
Check:
Power supply to the REAR OHP detection signal
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P20-8PIN<=>P20-7PIN: 5VDC
Check: REAR OHP detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
- Pins: P/J20-8PIN<=>P/J20-7PIN
4 - Photo reflecting status (paper is set): 0VDC Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
- Photo unreflecting status (no paper is set): 5VDC
NOTE: When setting the conditions, reflecting and
unreflecting, use white paper, not OHP sheet. Use of OHP
sheet will cause failure in judgement since it is transparent.
Check: REGI. HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the REGI. HARNESS ASSY have proper
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the REGI. HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J99<=>J91
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY
l Does the REGI. HARNESS ASSY have proper
6 Replace the REAR OHP SENSOR. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- P91<=>J20
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
REGI.SENSOR, REGI. HARNESS ASSY,
P/H HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the REGI. SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P20-3PIN<=>P20-1PIN: 5VDC
Check: Power supply to the REGI. detection signal
3 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
- P20-2PIN<=>P20-1PIN: 5VDC
Check: REGI. detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Replace the Go to Step 5.
- Pins: P/J20-2PIN<=>P/J20-1PIN
- Reflecting condition (paper is set): 0VDC
- Unreflecting condition (no paper is set): 5VDC
Check: REGI. HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity?
l Does the REGI. HARNESS ASSY have proper
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the REGI. HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J93<=>J91
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
6 Replace the REGI.SENSOR. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- P91<=>J20
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
REGI. CLUTCH, P/H HARNESS ASSY, REGI. HARNESS
ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the REGI. CLUTCH
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go t step 3.
Defective".
- P/J20-25PIN<=>P/J20-27PIN: 24VDC
Check: REGI. CLUTCH
l Does the REGI. CLUTCH have proper continuity at the
3 pins below? Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 4.
- Pins: J20-25PIN<=>J20-27PIN
- Resistance: 171 Ω
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
4 Go to Step 5. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- J20<=>P91
Check: REGI. HARNESS ASSY
l Does the REGI. HARNESS ASSY have proper
5 Replace the REGI. CLUTCH. Replace the REGI. HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J91<=>P110PIN
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
REGI. CLUTCH, P/H HARNESS ASSY, REGI. HARNESS
ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the REGI. CLUTCH
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P/J20-25PIN<=>P/J20-27PIN: 24VDC
Check: REGI. CLUTCH
l Does the REGI. CLUTCH have proper continuity at the
3 pins below? Replace the MCU PWB Go to Step 4.
- Pins: J20-25PIN<=>J20-27PIN
- Resistance: 174Ω
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
4 Go to Step 5. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- J20<=>P91
Check: REGI. HARNESS ASSY
l Does the REGI. HARNESS ASSY have proper
5 Replace the REGI. CLUTCH. Replace the REGI. HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J91<=>P110PIN
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 WASTE TONER SENSOR, WASTE TONER BOX, Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
TONER BOX HARNESS, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU
PWB
Check: Power supply to the WASTE TONER SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P18-A3PIN<=>P18-A1PIN: 5VDC
Check:
Power supply to the WASTE TONER detection signal
3 Go to Step 4. Go to Step MCU PWB
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P18-A2PIN <=>P18-A1PIN: 5VDC
Check: WASTE TONER detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
- Pins: P/J18-A2PIN <=>P/J18-A1PIN
4 Go to Step MCU PWB Go to Step 5.
- Passed condition: 0VDC
(=Waste toner level is Low.)
- Blocked condition: 5VDC
(=Waste toner level is High=Full)
Check: TONER BOX HARNESS electrical continuity
l Does the TONER BOX HARNESS have proper
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the TONER BOX HARNESS.
continuity at the pin below?
- J88<=>P116
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper Replace the WASTE TONER
6 Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pin below? SENSOR.
- J116<=>J18
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
TONER BOX SENSOR, TONER BOX HARNESS, MAIN
HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the TONER BOX SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P18-A6PIN<=>P18-A5PIN: 5VDC
Check: TONER BOX detection signal
3 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go go step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
- P18-A6PIN<=>P18-A5PIN: 5VDC
Check: TONER BOX detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
- Pin: P/J18-A6PIN<=>P/J18-A5PIN
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
- Passed condition: 0VDC
(=WASTE TONER BOX is installed)
- Blocked condition: 5VDC
(=WASTE TONER BOX is not installed.)
Check: TONER BOX HARNESS electrical continuity
l Does the TONER BOX HARNESS have proper
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the TONER BOX HARNESS.
continuity at the pins below?
- J83<=>P116
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
6 Replace the TONER BOX SENSOR. Replace the MAIN HARNESS.
continuity at the pins below?
- J116<=>J18
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 ROS ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, EXIT HARNESS, Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
TOP EXIT SENSOR, FRONT COVER SWITCH R, MAIN
HARNESS, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the SOS SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P14-1PIN<=>P14-3PIN: 5VDC
Check: Power supply to the SOS detection signal
3 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
- P14-2PIN<=>P14-3PIN: 5VDC
Check: Rotation of the Scanner Motor
4 l Does the Scanner Motor rotate when the printer is Go to Step 7. Go to Step 5.
turned on? (Check that the motor is making a sound.)
Check: Power supply to the Scanner Motor
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
5 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 6.
Defective"
- P14-10PIN<=>P14-11PIN: 24VDC
Check: Scanner Motor ON signal
l Does the voltage level changes correctly when the
6 scanner motor is turned on? Go to Step 7. Go to Step 15.
- P14-12PIN<=>P14-13PIN
- Changes from 24VDC to 0VDC
Check: Power supply to the LDD
7 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 8. Replace the LVPS.
- P33-1PIN<=>P33-2PIN: 5VDC
Check: LDD electrical continuity
8 l Does the LDD have proper continuity at the pins below? Go to Step 15. Go to Step 9.
- J33-1PIN<=> J33-2PIN
(To be continued.)
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
continuity at the pins below?
9 - J33-2PIN<=>P195-2PIN Go to Step 10. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
- P195-1PIN<=>J196-2PIN
- P196-1PIN<=>J194-1PIN
- J193-1PIN<=>J33-1PIN
Check: TOP COVER SWITCH electrical continuity
l Does the TOP COVER SWITCH have proper continuity
status depending on the conditions below?
10 Go to Step 11. Replace the TOP COVER SWITCH.
- Pins: J195-1PIN<=>J195-2PIN
- Contact area is pushed: Close
- Contact area is released: Open
Check: TOP COVER ASSY for its notche’s operation
11 l Is the notch in the TOP COVER ASSY pushing in the Go to Step 12. Replace the interfering part.
contact area of the TOP COVER SWITCH when the
TOP COVER ASSY is installed?
Check: FRONT COVER SWITCH R electrical continuity
l Do the terminals in the FRONT COVER SWITCH R
have proper continuity status depending on the Replace the FRONT COVER SWITCH
12 conditions below? Go to Step 13.
R.
- FRONT COVER is closed: Close
- FRONT COVER is open: Open
Check: FRONT COVER ASSY for notche’s action
13 l Is the notche in the COVER ASSY pushing in the Go to Step 14. Replace the interfering part.
contact point in the FRONT COVER SWITCH R when
the FRONT COVER ASSY is closed?
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
14 Go to Step 15 Replace the MAIN HARNESS.
continuity at the pins below?
- J116<=>J18
Check: MCU PWB replacement
15 l Does the problem still occur after replacing the MCU Replace the ROS ASSY. Problem solved.
PWB?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
ADC SENSOR ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the ADC Sensor
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P17-18PIN<=>P17-21PIN: 5VDC
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J17<=>J81
Check: ADC SENSOR ASSY replacement
4 l Does the problem still occur after replacing the ADC Replace the MCU PWB. Problem solved.
SENSOR ASSY?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
ADC SENSOR ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU
PWB
Check: Power supply to the ADC Solenoid
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P/J17-22PIN<=>P/J17-23PIN: 24VDC
Check: ADC Solenoid
l Does the ADC Solenoid have proper continuity at the
3 pins below? Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 4.
- Pins: J17-22PIN<=> 17-23PIN
- Resistance: 36 Ω
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
4 - Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J17<=>P81
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
CARTRIDGE, FUSER CONNECTOR, FUSER HARNESS
ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the CARTRIDGE SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P17-6PIN<=>P17-4PIN: 5VDC
Check:
Power supply to the CARTRIDGE detection signal
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P17-5PIN<=>P17-4PIN: 5VDC
Check: CARTRIDGE detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
- Pins: P/J17-5PIN<=>P/J17-4PIN
- Passed condition (cartridge is installed): 0VDC
- Blocked condition (cartridge is not installed): 5VDC
Check: CART. SENSOR HARNESS electrical continuity
l Does the CART. SENSOR HARNESS have proper
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the CART. SENSOR H-ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J168<=>P89
Check: EXIT HARNESS electrical continuity
l Does the EXIT HARNESS have proper continuity at the
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the EXIT HARNESS.
pins below?
- J89<=>J161
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
7 Replace the MCU PWB. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J161<=>J17
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
USED CART. SENSOR, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU
PWB
Check: Power supply to the USED CART. SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P17-3PIN<=>P17-1PIN: 5VDC
Check:
Power supply to the USED CART. detection signal
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P17-2PIN<=>P17-1PIN: 5VDC
Check: USED CART. detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
- Pins: P/J17-2PIN<=>P/J17-1PIN
- Passed condition (Cartridge is new): 0VDC
- Blocked condition (Cartridge is old): 5VDC
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
5 Replace the USED CART. SENSOR. Replace the MAIN HARNESS.
continuity at the pins below?
- J17<=>J87
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
ROTARY SENSOR, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check:
Power supply to the ROTARY SENSOR. SENSOR Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 Go to Step 3.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Defective".
- P19-6PIN<=>P17-4PIN: 5VDC
Check: Power supply to the ROTARY SENSOR
detection signal
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P19-5PIN<=>P17-4PIN: 5VDC
Check: ROTARY SENSOR detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
- Pins: P/J19-5PIN<=>P/J17-4PIN
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
- Penetrated condition: 0VDC
(= The notch is not detected.)
- Blocked condition: 5VDC
(=The notche is detected.)
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
5 Replace the ROTARY SENSOR. Replace the MAIN HARNESS.
continuity at the pins below?
- J19<=>J58
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
TRO SENSOR, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the TRO SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P17-12PIN<=>P17-14PIN: 5VDC
Check: Power supply to the TRO detection signal
3 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
- P17-13PIN<=>P17-14PIN: 5VDC
Check: TRO detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
- Pins: P/J17-13PIN<=>P/J17-14PIN
4 - Reflecting condition: 0VDC Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
(TRO mark in the IBT BELT ASSY is detected.)
- Unreflecting condition: 5VDC
(Area other than TRO mark in the IBT BELT ASSY is
detected.)
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
5 Replace the TRO SENSOR. Replace the MAIN HARNESS.
continuity at the pins below?
- J116<=>J18
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
BTR CAM SOLENOID, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU
PWB
Check: Power supply to the BTR CAM SOLENOID
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P/J19-39PIN<=>P/J21-2PIN: 24VDC
Check: BTR CAM SOLENOID electrical continuity
l Does the BTR CAM SOLENOID have proper continuity
3 at the pins below? Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 4.
- Pins: J19-39PIN<=>J19-40PIN
- Resistance: 215Ω
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
4 Replace the BTR CAM SOLENOID. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J19<=> J63PIN
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
FUSER IN SENSOR, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, FUSER
HARNESS ASSY, FUSER IN HARNESS, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the FUSER IN SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P19-7PIN<=>P19-8PIN: 5VDC
Check: Power supply to the FUSER IN detection signal
3 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
- P19-8PIN<=>P19-9PIN: 5VDC
Check: FUSER IN detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
- Pins: P/J19-8PIN<=>P/J19-9PIN
- Passed condition (paper is set.): 0VDC
- Blocked condition (no paper is set.): 5VDC
Check: FUSER IN HARNESS electrical continuity
l Does the FUSER IN HARNESS have proper continuity
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the FUSER IN HARNESS.
at the pin below?
- J117<=>P76
Check: FUSER HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the FUSER HARNESS ASSY have proper
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the FUSER HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J71<=>J76
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
7 Replace the FUSER IN SENSOR. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
- P71<=>J19
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
FUSER EXIT SENSOR, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, FUSER
HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the FUSER EXIT SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P19-12PIN<=>P19-13PIN: 5VDC
Check:
Power supply to the FUSER EXIT detection signal
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P19-13PIN<=>P19-14PIN: 5VDC
Check: FUSER EXIT detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
4 Replace the MCU PWB Go to Step 5.
- Pins: P/J19-13PIN<=>P/J19-14PIN
- Penetrated condition (paper is set.): 0VDC
- Blocked condition (no paper is set.): 5VDC
Check: MAIN HARNESS electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS have proper continuity at
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the HARNESS.
the pins below?
- J75<=>J72
Check: FUSER HARNESS ASSY
l Does the FUSER HARNESS ASSY have proper
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the FUSER HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J71<=>J72
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
7 Replace the FUSER EXIT SENSOR. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- P71<=>J19
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
TEMP. SENSOR ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, FUSER
HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Thermistor in the TEMP. SENSOR ASSY
Replace/clean the TEMP. SENSOR
2 l Is the detection area of the thermistor smeared or ASSY.
Go to Step 3.
lodged with any foreign matter?
Check:
TEMP. SENSOR ASSY for thermistor resistance
Replace/clean the TEMP. SENSOR
3 l Is the resistance correct at the pins below? Go to Step 4.
ASSY.
- Pins: P72-4PIN<=>P72-5PIN
- Resistance: 240 kΩ (at 18 − 20°C)
Check: FUSER HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the FUSER HARNESS ASSY have proper
4 Go to Step 5. Replace the FUSER HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J71<=>J72
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
5 Replace the MCU PWB. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- P71<=>J19
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
OIL CAM SOLENOID, FUSER HARNESS ASSY, MAIN
HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the OIL CAM SOLENOID
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P/J18-B3PIN<=>P/J21-2PIN: 24VDC
Check: OIL CAM SOLENOID
l Does the OIL CAM SOLENOID have proper continuity
3 at the pins below? Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 4.
- Pins: J18-B3PIN<=>J18-B4PIN
- Resistance: 215Ω
Check: FUSER HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the FUSER HARNESS ASSY have proper
4 Go to Step 5. Replace the FUSER HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J73<=>J71PIN
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
5 Replace the OIL CAM SOLENOID. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- P71<=>J18PIN
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
CLEANER CAM SOLENOID, FUSER HARNESS ASSY,
MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check:
Power supply to the CLEANER CAM SOLENOID Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
2 Go to Step 3.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Defective".
- P/J18-B5PIN<=>P/J21-2PIN: 24VDC
Check: CLEANER CAM SOLENOID
l Does the CLEANER CAM SOLENOID have proper
3 continuity at the pins below? Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 4.
- J18-B5PIN<=>J18-B4PIN
- 215Ω
Check: FUSER HARNESS ASSY
l Does the FUSER HARNESS ASSY have proper
4 Go to Step 5. Replace the FUSER HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J73<=> J71PIN
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper Replace the CLEANER CAM
5 Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below? SOLENOID.
- P71<=> J18PIN
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
TOP EXIT SENSOR, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, EXIT
HARNESS, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the TOP EXIT SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P17-7PIN<=>P17-8PIN: 5VDC
Check: Power supply to the TOP EXIT
3 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
• P17-9PIN<=>P17-8PIN: 5VDC
Check: TOP EXIT detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
- P/J17-9PIN<=>P/J17-8PIN
- Passed condition (Paper is set): 0VDC
- Blocked condition (No paper is set): 5VDC
Check: EXIT HARNESS electrical continuity
l Does the EXIT HARNESS have proper continuity at the
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the EXIT HARNESS.
pins below?
- J165<=>J161
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
6 Replace the TOP EXIT SENSOR. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J161<=>J17
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
PROCESS MOTOR ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU
PWB
Check: Power supply to the PROCESS MOTOR ASSY
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 4. Go to Step 3.
- P/J51-2<=>P/J51-1: 24VDC
Check: Power supply to the LVPS
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
3 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
Defective".
- J32-9<=>J32-10: 24VDC
Check:
Power supply to the PROCESS MOTOR’s ON signal
4 Go to Step 5. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P17-31<=>P17-33: 24VDC
Check:
Power supply to the PROCESS MOTOR SPEED signal
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P17-32<=>P17-33: 24VDC
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper Replace the PROCESS MOTOR
6 Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below? ASSY.
- J52<=>J17
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
P/H MOTOR ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the P/H MOTOR ASSY
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 4. Go to Step 3.
- P/J49-2<=>P/J49-1: 24VDC
Check: Power supply to the LVPS
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
3 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
Defective".
- J32-8<=>J32-7: 24VDC
Check: Power supply to the P/H MOTOR ON signal
4 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 5. Replace the MCU PWB.
- P17-26<=>P17-28: 24VDC
Check: Power supply to the P/H MOTOR SPEED signal
5 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 6. Replace the MCU PWB.
- P17-27<=>P17-28: 24VDC
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
6 l Is there proper continuity at the pin below? Replace the P/H MOTOR ASSY. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
- J50<=>J17
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
ROTARY MOTOR ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU
PWB
Check: Power supply to the ROTARY MOTOR ASSY
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 4. Go to Step 3.
- P/J246-3<=>P/J246-1: 24VDC
Check: Power supply to the LVPS
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
3 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
Defective".
- J32-3<=>J32-2: 24VDC
Check: Power supply to the ROTARY MOTOR ASSY
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
4 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 5.
Defective".
- P16-12<=>P16-11: 5VDC
Check:
Voltage level of the ROTARY MOTOR ON signal
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P16-9<=>P16-11: 24VDC
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
6 Replace the ROTARY MOTOR ASSY. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J50<=>J17
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
DISPENSE MOTOR ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU
PWB
Check: Power supply to the DISPENSE MOTOR ASSY
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P18-A8PIN<=>P18-A9PIN: 24VDC
Check: Power supply to the MAIN HARNESS ASSY
3 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 4. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
- J18<=>J55
Check: MCU PWB replacement
Replace the DISPENSE MOTOR
4 l Does the problem still occur after replacing the MCU ASSY.
Problem solved.
PWB?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
DEVE. CLUTCH ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU
PWB
Check: Power supply to the DEVE. CLUTCH ASSY
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P19-31PIN<=>P19-32PIN: 24VDC
Check: Power supply to the DEVE. CLUTCH ASSY
l Does the have proper continuity at the pins belowIs the
3 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 4.
voltage level correct at the pins below?
- J19-31PIN<=>J19-32PIN 150Ω
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
4 Replace the DEVE. CLUTCH ASSY. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J19<=>J56
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 BCR WIRE, DEVE. WIRE, BCR CONNECTOR ASSY, Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
DEVE. CONTACT ASSY, DTS WIRE, DTS PLATE, 2ND
BTR ASSY, TRANSFER ASSY, 2ND BTR CAM ASSY,
HVPS, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: BCR WIRE
2 Go to Step 3. Replace the BCR WIRE.
l Do the terminals on the BCR WIRE have continuity?
Check: DEVE. WIRE
3 l Do the terminals on the DEVE. WIRE have proper Go to Step 4. Replace the DEVE. WIRE.
continuity?
Check: BCR CONNECTOR ASSY
Reinstall /replace the BCR
4 l Is the BCR CONNECTOR ASSY deformed, damaged, CONNECTOR ASSY.
Go to Step 5.
or installed improperly?
Check: DEVE. CONTACT ASSY
Reinstall/replace the DEVE. CONTACT
5 l Is the DEVE. CONTACT ASSY deformed or damaged? Go to Step 6.
ASSY.
l Is the DEVE. CONTACT ASSY installed improperly?
Check: DTS WIRE
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the 2ND BTR CAM ASSY.
l Do the terminals on the DEVE. WIRE have continuity?
Check: DTS PLATE
7 l Is the DTS PLATE deformed damaged, or installed Replace the 2ND BTR CAM ASSY. Go to Step 8.
improperly?
Check: 2ND BTR ASSY
8 l Do the terminals in the high voltage lead in the 2ND Go to Step 9. Replace the 2ND BTR ASSY.
BTR ASSY have proper continuity?
Check: TRANSFER ASSY
l Does the high voltage flow in the TRANSFER ASSY
have proper continuity? (Check the points below for
9 continuity.)
Go to Step 10. Replace the TRANSFER ASSY.
- 1ST BTR WIRE terminal<=>1ST BTR
- CONTACT ROLL WIRE terminal<=>1ST BTR
(To be continued.)
(Continued)
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Check: Power supply to the HVPS
10 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 12. Go to Step 11.
- P/J41-1<=>P/J41-3: 24VDC
Check: Power supply to the LVPS
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
11 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
Defective".
- J32-4<=>J32-5: 24VDC
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have continuity at the
12 Go to Step 13. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
pins below?
- J16<=>J42
Check: MCU PWB replacement
13 l Does the problem still occur after replacing the MCU Go to Step HVPS Problem solved.
PWB?
Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 LVPS, BCR CONNECTOR ASSY, DEVE. CONTACT Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
ASSY, 2ND BTR ASSY, H/R HEATER, P/R HEATER,
DRUM CARTRIDGE, MCU PWB
2 l Is the printer properly grounded? Go to Step 3. Ground the printer properly.
l Is another electrical product near the printer making a Move the printer and the electrical
3 Go to Step 4.
noise? product away from each other.
Check: LVPS
4 l Is the grounding wire securely connected to the power Go to Step 5. Fix the grounding wire securely.
switch/inlet part in the LVPS?
Check: BCR CONNECTOR ASSY
Reinstall/replace the BCR
5 l Is the BCR CONNECTOR ASSY deformed, damaged, CONNECTOR ASSY.
Go to Step 6.
or installed improperly?
Check: DEVE. CONTACT ASSY
Reinstall/replace the DEVE. CONTACT
6 l Is the DEVE. CONTACT ASSY deformed, damaged, or ASSY.
Go to Step 7.
installed improperly?
Check: 2ND BTR ASSY
7 l Does the high voltage flow in the 2ND BTR ASSY have Go to Step 8. Replace the 2ND BTR ASSY.
proper continuity?
Check: H/R HEATER, P/R HEATER
8 l Are the both ends of the H/R HEATER, P/R HEATER Go to Step 9. Fix them properly.
securely fixed?
Check: DRUM CARTRIDGE replacement
9 l Does the problem still occur after replacing the DRUM Go to Step 10. Problem solved.
CARTRIDGE?
Check: MCU PWB replacement
10 l Does the problem still occur after replacing the MCU Go to Step 11. Problem solved.
PWB?
Check the parts listed for the preliminary inspection and
11 other relevant parts for any abnormality. Replace/reinstall the defective part. Problem solved. *1
l Is any of the parts defective?
*1: If the problem still occurs after all steps, you can wait and see what happens, since some external cause of the problem is considered.
5.4 Print Quality Troubleshooting 5.4.1 Print Quality Troubleshooting Entry Chart
This section describes how to solve the print quality problems by using
the Level 3 FIPs.
C H E C K <Preliminary inspection>
P O IN T S T A R T
In each FIP, you are required to perform the
“Preliminary inspection” prior to any other actions.
The Preliminary inspection involves the following: R u n a te s t p r in t.
n Check for any part that does not meet the
specifications.
n Check if any part has been installed improperly.
n Check for part that is damaged, deformed, smeared, D o y o u fin d th e N o
or lodged with foreign matter. F IP to p e rfo rm ?
Y e s
P e rfo rm th e c o r r e s p o n d in g F IP . T r o u b le s h o o t th e p r o b le m .
N o H a s th e p r o b le m N o H a s th e p r o b le m
b e e n s o lv e d ? b e e n s o lv e d ?
Y e s Y e s
F in is h e d . F in is h e d .
5.4.2 Print Quality FIP The FIPs for the common problems are as listed below:
NOTE: The Print Quality FIP is applicable on the condition that the n FIP-3.1 "Low image density"
printer controller (Controller PWB) is functioning properly. To
n FIP-3.2 "Blank prints"
isolate the cause of the problem, whether the engine side or
controller side, you can run a test print using the engine or n FIP-3.3 "Black prints"
diagnostic board. (Some print problems can not be explained by
n FIP-3.4 "White/light deletion along the Paper Feed Direction"
the test print.)
n FIP-3.5 "White/Shady deletion lines appear vertically to the
If the test print using the engine or diagnostic board is performed
paper feeding direction"
properly, it means the Controller PWB is faulty. On the other
hand, if neither test runs abnormally, it means the fault is on the n FIP-3.6 "Black/Color Spots"
engine side.
n FIP-3.7 "Toner Smearing"
If “a fault on the Controller PWB side” is assumed, replace the
n FIP-3.8 "Skew"
Controller PWB and the interface; and check the performance. If
the same trouble occurs after replacement, check the host n FIP-3.9 "Creased paper"
computer and perform troubleshooting efficiently using the
n FIP-3.10 "Improper fusing"
following print quality FIPs.
NOTE: Refer to the table below which shows the circumference (=
When you find a print quality problem, output an image on a A4 or A3 printed cycle) of each roll that is related in the print quality
paper to grasp and understand the troubled condition well and apply the troubleshooting.
appropriate solution.
If the problem is not solved using the FIP, repeat the FIP again, and Table 5-24. Roller Circumferences
replace the parts listed in the “Preliminary inspection” one by one to Parts (Higher Assembly) Cycle
troubleshoot. Magnet Roll (DEVELOPER ASSY.) 28 mm
Drum (DRUM CARTRIDGE) 264 mm
BCR (DRUM CARTRIDGE) 44 mm
1ST BTR (TRANSFER ASSY) 59 mm
BACK UP ROLL (TRANSFER ASSY) 88 mm
2ND BTR (2ND BTR ASSY) 88 mm
HEAT ROLL (MAIN FUSER ASSY) 117 mm
PRESSURE ROLL (MAIN FUSER ASSY) 117 mm
OIL ROLL (OIL ROLL ASSY) 107 mm
FEED ROLL 90 mm
Improper Charging/Development
During the image transfer, turn the printer off and
examine the toner image on the drum surface Refer to “FIP-2.38 "HVPS is
3 (point before the transfer) visually. Defective"”.
l Is the toner image on the drum developed
properly?
Improper Charging/Development
During the image transfer, turn the printer off and
examine the toner image on the drum surface Refer to “FIP-2.38 "HVPS is
3 (point before the transfer) visually. Defective"”.
l Is the toner image on the drum developed
properly?
Improper charging
Using a sheet of paper, cover the laser beam
1 emission window and run a print.
Refer to “FIP-2.38 "HVPS is Defective"”.
Phenomenon:
White/light bands run along the direction of paper feeding.
Paper Feeding Direction
Improper charging
1 Replace the DRUM CARTRIDGE. Replace the DRUM CARTRIDGE.
l Has the problem been solved?
ROS ASSY malfunction
Using a sheet of paper, cover the laser beam Refer to “FIP-1.22 "ROS ASSY Related
2 emission window half way and run a print. Error"”.
l Does the problem still occurs?
FUSER ASSY malfunction
Is the HEAT ROLL/PRESSURE ROLL in the
3 Replace the FUSER ASSY.
FUSER ASSY damaged, smeared, or lodged with
any foreign matter?
FIP-3.5 White/Shady deletion lines appear vertically to the paper feeding direction
Phenomenon:
White/light deletion lines run vertically to the paper feeding direction.
Paper Feeding Direction
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
Developer ASSY, DRUM CARTRIDGE, BELT TRANSFER ASSY, 2ND BTR, HEAT ROLL, PRESSURE
ROLL, OIL ROLL ASSY, FEED ROLL ASSY
SER578X
Damp paper
Replace the paper. (Instruct the
1 Replace the paper with new one.
customer to store paper in a dry place.)
l Has the problem been solved?
Improper Charging/Development
During the image transfer, turn the printer off and
examine the toner image on the drum surface Refer to “FIP-2.38 "HVPS is
2 (point before the transfer) visually. Defective"”.
l Is the toner image on the drum developed
properly?
Deteriorated carrier
Replace the relevant Developer assy with a new
1 one.
Replace the Developer assy.
HVPS malfunction
3 Replace the HVPS. Replace the HVPS.
l Has the problem been solved?
DRUM CARTRIDGE malfunction
4 Replace the DRUM CARTRIDGE with a new one. Replace the DRUM CARTRIDGE.
l Has the problem been solved?
FIP-3.8 Skew
Damp paper
Replace the Paper. (Instruct the
1 Replace the paper with new ones.
customer to store paper in a dry place.)
l Does the problem still occur?
HEAT ROLL/PRESSURE ROLL in the FUSER
ASSY malfunction Clean or replace the HEAT ROLL/
2 l Is the HEAT ROLL/PRESSURE ROLL in the PRESSURE ROLL in the FUSER
FUSER ASSY damaged, smeared, lodged with ASSY.
any foreign matter?
Paper skew
3 Refer to FIP-3.8 "Skew".
l Is paper fed aslant?
Bad paper path condition
4 l Is the paper path damaged, smeared, or lodged Clean or replace the defective part.
with any foreign matter?
Phenomenon:
Output image is easily rubbed off the paper.
Damp paper
Replace the Paper. (Instruct the
1 Replace the paper with new one.
customer to store paper in a dry place.)
l Has the problem been solved?
TEMP. SENSOR ASSY Clean or replace the TEMP. SENSOR
2
l Is the TEMP. SENSOR ASSY surface dirty? ASSY.
6
MAINTENANCE
EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B
Contents
ABOUT ON-SITE SERVICING ...................................................................... 1
On-site Service Flow ................................................................................. 2
Description of the On-site Service............................................................. 3
MAINTENANCE MENU ................................................................................. 5
Entry to the Maintenance Menu ................................................................ 5
Engine Status Sheet.................................................................................. 6
CONSUMABLE REPLACEMENT ................................................................. 8
TONER CARTRIDGE Replacement ......................................................... 9
OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY Replacement...................................................... 11
DRUM CARTRIDGE Replacement ......................................................... 12
WASTE TONER BOX Replacement ....................................................... 14
REGULARLY REPLACED PART REPLACEMENT ................................... 15
INSTALLATION ........................................................................................... 15
EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B
P r e lim in a r y C h e c k
1 . C h e c k th e p r in te r c o n d itio n w ith th e u s e r .
2 . E n s u re s a fe ty .
3 . P r in t a s ta tu s s h e e t to c h e c k th e p r in te r c o n d itio n .
4 . P r in t a n e n g in e s ta tu s s h e e t to c h e c k th e e n g in e h is to r y .
P u r p o s e o f v is itin g
R e p a ir M a in te n a n c e
R e a p p e a r a n c e o f th e tr o u b le
G o to C h a p te r 5 " T o u b le s h o o tin g " .
< C le a n in g >
< R e p la c e m e n t o f c o n s u m a b le s a n d
r e g u la r r e p la c e d p a r t>
C h e c k in g t h e p r in t e r 's o v e r a ll o p e r a t io n .
F in a l c h e c k o u t
1 . E x te r io r c h e c k o f th e p r itn e r
2 . In s tr u c tin g th e u s e r , if n e c e s s a r y .
6.1.2 Description of the On-site Service 2. If any abnormality is found in the listed check points:
This section gives instruction on the on-site service in detail. n Check the life counters of the consumables and regularly
replaced parts. (See Section 6.2.)
o Preliminary Check
n Perform the adjustment. (See Chapter 3.)
1. Ask the users the following: o Cleaning
n How often paper feed malfunction occurs.
1. Remove any foreign matter lodged in the 2ND BTR ASSEMBLY,
n What the printer is used like. (paper, volume, environment, etc.) MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY, FUSER ASSEMBLY, and rollers in the
n Output quality paper paths and so on. Then clean the dirt using a brush or dry soft
cloth.
o Reappearance of the trouble
NOTE:To remove severe dirt, remove it with a moistened cloth then
Perform troubleshooting described in Chapter 5. wipe with a dry cloth. Be sure not to mar the dirty part during
cleaning.
1. Using diagnostic function, identify the trouble and perform
necessary troubleshooting. 2. Using a soft cloth, clean out the spilt toner in the following parts:
DEVELOPER, TONER CARTRIDGE (including their installing
2. If necessary, proceed to “Level 1 FIP” and “Level 2 FIP”. positions), inside of the FRONT COVER, WASTE TONER BOX
installation point and its adjacent parts, BELT CLEANER
3. If a print quality problem (completely blank/black page), a fatal
ASSEMBLY and its adjacent parts.
problem, due to engine malfunction is identified, go to “Print quality
troubleshooting”. 3. Clean the fan ducts. Remove the REAR COVER and remove the
o Print quality check dust adhered to the DEVE. FAN, FUSER FAN, and REAR COVER
with a brush. Also, remove the dust accumulated on the
1. Print several pages of monochrome and color status sheet to check CONTROLLER FAN and the TOP COVER by removing the TOP
print quality. COVER.
<Points to check> NOTE:Clogged dust around the fan ducts and fans can heat up the
air inside of the printer, which may cause a printer
n Color balance
malfunction.
n Improper color position
n Too dark/light printing
n Abnormal reappearance at low density
n Others
1. After repairing or maintenance, output several status sheets and n How to replace the consumables
check that the printer operates normally.
n What kind of paper can be used for the printer.
2. After repairing or maintenance, output an engine status sheet.
NOTE:Referring the total number of the printed pages, determine if
any regularly replaced part needs replacing, and replace it if
necessary.
After servicing, give an overall checking to the printer. Print a few status
sheets and a test prints with data sent from the host computer. Check
the following:
n Print quality: Check that print quality is good.
n Operation: Check that paper is fed properly and there is no
abnormal noise.
6.2 Maintenance Menu 2. Referring to the flowchart below, activate the desirable function
throughout the panel operation.
Maintenance Menu contains the following functions:
n Shows life counter values for consumables and regularly R e a d y
replaced parts and total number of printed pages and color print S e le c T y p e b u tto n
pages
n Resets the counter values for the regularly replaced parts T e s t M e n u
n Resets the counter values for total printed page number and M e n u b u tto n
total color print pages.
M a in te n a n c e M e n u
Ite m b u tto n E n te r b u tto n
6.2.1 Entry to the Maintenance Menu
2 n d B T R R e s e t C le a r e d th e c o u n te r
C A U T IO N n Check the following before entering the Maintenance
menu: C le a r e d th e c o u n te r
IB T C le a n e r R e s e t
-All interface cables are disconnected.
F u s e r U n it R e s e t C le a r e d th e c o u n te r
-“Service Call Error” is not indicated.
P a g e C o u n t R e s e t C le a r e d th e c o u n te r
n Before exiting the menu, ensure the engine is not live.
If not, you can turn the printer off. E n g in g e S ta tu s S h e e t P r in ts th e E n g in e S ta tu s S h e e t
1. Turn the printer on while pressing the “On Line”, “Form Feed”, and
Figure 6-2. Maintenance Menu Operation
“Continue”. All LED lamps and the LCD come on and the following
messages appears consequently in the LCD. (Keep the buttons
down until instructed to do so.)
RAMCHECK **.*MB
Note: **.* above represents numeric which counts up.
Note: Release the buttons as the next message appears.
MAINTENANCE MODE
Ready
(The printer is in a usual ready status.)
T O N E R C A R T R ID G E
D R U M C A R T R ID G E
2 N D B T R A S S Y
B E L T C L E A N E R A S S Y
O IL R O L L A S S Y
M A IN F U S E R A S S Y
X X X
Z Z Z
Y Y Y
o Item description
TONER CARTRIDGE:
Shows accumulated operation time of the Toner Dispense
Mechanism. The value is converted into the total page number as
shown below:
Total page number (approximately) = Counter value/Life value ×
4500 for K toner, × 6000 for Y, M, C toners.
Individual counter value for each color of toner cartridge is stored in
the EEPROM on the MCU PWB. When a new cartridge is detected,
the counter for the appropriate counter is automatically reset.
As for toner level, users can check by printing a status sheet or panel
operation.
Servicers, on the other hand, can access to all the detailed information
through out each cousumabels life using the maintenance mode.
6.3.1 TONER CARTRIDGE Replacement 3. If you can see the color that you need to replace at the installation
window, go to Step 4. If you the cartridge to be replaced is not in the
There are Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, and K (Black) Toner cartridges installation window, move it into the window by repeating the
available for TONER CARTRIDGE. operation described in the figure below.
L o c k in g p o s itio n
Y e llo w Y e llo w
M a g e n ta M a g e n ta
C y a n C y a n
B la c k B la c k
U n lo c k in g p o s itio n
Figure 6-5. FRONT COVER Open Figure 6-7. TONER CARTRIDGE Replacement 2
5. Hold a new TONER CARTRIDGE by the right and left ends and Y e llo w Y e llo w
gently shake it up and down to distribute toner evenly. M a g e n t M a g e n t
C y a n C y a n
B la c k B la c k
U n lo c k in g p o s itio n
8. Close the FRONT COVER and check that the LCD is indicating
“Ready”.
Figure 6-9. TONER CARTRIDGE Replacement 4 NOTE: The TONER CARTRIDGE counter is automatically reset when a
new TONER CARTRIDGE is detected.
6. Hold the cartridge arrow side up. Insert it all the way into the
cartridge slot. Then turn the cartridge knob clockwise 90 degrees so
that the l symbol on the knob is aligned with the locking symbol.
NOTE:If the TONER CARTRIDGE is not properly positioned, it may
cause toner to spill inside the printer and brings out low print
quality and printer malfunction and errors.
6.3.2 OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY Replacement 3. Remove the cover from a new OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY.
OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY is equipped to fix toner image exactly on a 4. Remove 2 shipping pins from both sides of the OIL ROLL
paper with oil, without sticking a paper to the heat roll. ASSEMBLY.
2. Hold the handle on the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY and remove it.
6.3.3 DRUM CARTRIDGE Replacement 3. Turn the TENSION LEVER in the direction indicated with the arrow.
(See the figure on the left.)
The photoconductor of the DRUM CARTRIDGE is exposed by the ROS
ASSEMBLY and developed by the DEVELOPER ASSEMBLY, and 4. Turn the DRUM CARTRIDGE LEVER in the direction indicated with
transmits images onto the IBT. the arrow. (See the figure on the right.)
A consumable DRUM CARTRIDGE ASSEMBLY contains the WASTE
TONER BOX.
7. Remove the protective sheet on a new DRUM CARTRIDGE. 9. Turn the lever on the DRUM CARTRIDGE in the direction indicated
with the arrow.
8. Hold the handle of the top of the DRUM CARTRIDGE and place the
right and left guide edges on the rails in the printer, and insert the Figure 6-20. DRUM CARTRIDGE Replacement 6
DRUM CARTRIDGE straight into the printer. Be sure to push it
10. Turn the TENSION LEVER in the direction indicated with the arrow
enough to feel resistance.
to align it with the l symbol.
NOTE:Ensure that the photo conductor (a blue cyrindrical part) is
not in contact with any parts inside the printer during its
installation.
6.3.4 WASTE TONER BOX Replacement 3. Pull the WASTE TONER BOX straight out.
WASTE TONER BOX is used to collect toner that was not used for
printing. It is not necessary to change the WASTE TONER BOX when
the DRUM CARTRIDGE is also replaced, because a consumable
DRUM CARTRIDGE contains a WASTE TONER BOX.
2. Hold the lever and push down the tab of the WASTE TONER BOX. 4. Hold the handle on a new WASTE TONER BOX and insert it into
the printer all the way until the tab clicks.
If you have replaced any of the regularly replaced parts, perform the o Power
relevant counter reset in the Maintenance Menu. Connect the printer power cable to a dedicated wall outlet. Do not
share the outlet power with other extension cords. Make sure the
Table 6-1. Regularly Replaced Part power meets the power specifications defined for this printer. (The
Unit Reference Section
maximum power consumption of this printer is 1100W.))
2ND BTR ASSEMBLY Section 3.2.11.5
W A R N IN G Plug the cord directly into the wall outlet which can
MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY Section 3.2.12.3
provide more than the maximum demand power for
the printer.
o Ground
The printer must be properly grounded.
10) Remove a total of 4 spacers from where the toner cartridges are 18) Install the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY above the FUSER
inserted. ASSEMBLY.
11) Unpack the TONER CARTRIDGEs. Hold both ends of each 19) Close the FUSER ASSEMBLY.
cartridge and shake several times.
20) Draw out the UNIVERSAL TRAY. Remove the packing material
12) Rotate the ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY and install the (expanded polystyrene) from the UNIVERSAL TRAY.
TONER CARTRIDGEs.
21) Press down the BOTTOM PLATE ASSEMBLY in the
NOTE:Install each TONER CARTRIDGE by matching the toner UNIVERSAL TRAY and lock it at the bottom.
color with the color of the installation window.
22) Put paper in the UNIVERSAL TRAY.
NOTE:To rotate the ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY, press up the
ROTARY LATCH LEVER and rotate the ROTARY KNOB NOTE:When putting paper in the tray, be sure to:
ASSEMBLY clockwise.
- Align the four corners of the paper before putting it in the tray.
13) Close the FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY. - Place all paper under the pawls at the front right corner of the
tray.
14) Open the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY. Remove the two spacers from
- Set the paper guide corresponding to the paper size.
the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY.
23) Push in the UNIVERSAL TRAY.
15) Close the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY.
24) Put paper in the MSI ASSEMBLY.
16) Open the FUSER ASSEMBLY. Remove the packing materials
(expanded polystyrene). NOTE:When putting paper in the tray, be sure to:
17) Open the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. Remove the protective cover - Align the four corners of the paper before putting it in the tray.
and locking pins.
- Set a stack of paper under the stopper in the front right corner
NOTE:Keep the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY on a level position as it is of the tray.
installed in the printer. The internal fuser oil may leak if the - Set the paper guide corresponding to the paper size.
OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY is in a vertical or inclined position.
25) Connect the power cord.
NOTE:Do not touch the surface of the white roll in the OIL ROLL
ASSEMBLY because the white roll is filled with fuser oil. 26) Turn on the printer by the power switch.
27) Run a test print from each paper cassette to confirm that the
printer works fine.
28) Connect the printer to the PC and send print data to the printer.
APPENDIX
EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B
Contents
PART LIST ..................................................................................................... 1 Applicable Standards ..........................................................................70
How to Use the Part List.............................................................................1 Installation ................................................................................................70
Part List Table ............................................................................................2 Part List (Large Capacity Paper Unit) ......................................................71
Exploded Diagrams ....................................................................................6 Exploded Diagrams ..................................................................................72
WIRING DIAGRAMS.................................................................................... 20 Wiring Diagrams.......................................................................................74
P/J Locations............................................................................................20
Plug and Jack (P/J) Location Table..........................................................24
WIRING DIAGRAMS AND SIGNA LNFORMATION................................... 28
Master Wiring Diagram.............................................................................28
Wiring and Signal Description Between Components..............................30
Organization ........................................................................................30
Notations on the Diagrams for the Wiring and
Signal Descriptions between Components ......................................32
Wiring Diagram - §1 ............................................................................33
Wiring Diagram - §2 ............................................................................35
Wiring Diagram - §3 ............................................................................37
Wiring Diagram - §4 ............................................................................39
Wiring Diagram - §5 ............................................................................41
Wiring Diagram - §6 ............................................................................43
Wiring Diagram - §7 ............................................................................45
Wiring Diagram - §8 ............................................................................47
Wiring Diagram - §9 ............................................................................49
Wiring Diagram - §10 ..........................................................................51
Wiring Diagram - §11 ..........................................................................53
Wiring Diagram - §12 ..........................................................................55
Wiring Diagram - §13 ..........................................................................57
COMPONENT LAYOUT .............................................................................. 59
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS .................................................................................. 61
LARGE CAPACITY PAPER UNIT............................................................... 69
Product Specifications..............................................................................69
Basic Specifications ............................................................................69
Paper Specifications ............................................................................69
Environmental Condition .....................................................................69
Reliability and Durability ......................................................................70
Electrical Specifications .......................................................................70
EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B
NOTE: For spare parts, see the Spare Parts List (published separately).
NOTE: For harness and wire connectors (P/J), see Section A.3 “Wiring
Diagrams”.
Table A-3. Part List (3/9) Table A-4. Part List (4/9)
No. PL No. Part Name Reference No. PL No. Part Name Reference
60 PL 4.2.11 PICK UP ROLL 3.2.7.8 89 PL 4.3.16 SENSOR 3.2.7.14
61 PL 4.2.15 BEARING 3.2.7.12 90 PL 5.1.1 MAIN P/H ASSY (With 2-20) 3.2.8.1
62 PL 4.2.16 LEVER STOPPER 91 PL 5.1.4 P/H TURN CHUTE ASSY 3.2.8.3
63 PL 4.2.17 PICK UP CAM GEAR 3.2.7.10/12 92 PL 5.1.5 PRE-REGI. CHUTE ASSY 3.2.8.6
64 PL 4.2.18 CAM GEAR SPRING 93 PL 5.1.6 REGI. CHUTE ASSY 3.2.8.4
65 PL 4.2.19 PICK UP GEAR 3.2.7.11/12 94 PL 5.1.7 P/H FRONT RAIL-S 3.2.8.1
66 PL 4.2.20 PICK UP SPRING 3.2.7.11/12 95 PL 5.1.8 P/H FRONT RAIL-L 3.2.8.1
67 PL 4.2.21 PICK UP SOLENOID 3.2.7.10 96 PL 5.1.9 P/H REAR RAIL-S 3.2.8.1
68 PL 4.2.22 GEAR LEVER 97 PL 5.1.10 P/H REAR RAIL-L 3.2.8.1
69 PL 4.2.23 GEAR LEVER SPRING 98 PL 5.1.20 MAIN P/H COVER 3.2.7.2
70 PL 4.2.24 BEARING 99 PL 5.1.30 LATCH ARM ASSY
71 PL 4.2.25 MSI SHAFT 3.2.7.11 100 PL 5.2.3 PRE-REGI. KNOB ASSY 3.2.8.6
72 PL 4.2.26 MSI CLUTCH 3.2.7.11 101 PL 5.2.4 PRE-REGI. ROLL ASSY 3.2.8.6
73 PL 4.2.27 MSI GEAR 3.2.7.11 102 PL 5.2.5 PRE-REGI. BEARING 3.2.8.6
74 PL 4.2.28 MSI REAR BEARING 103 PL 5.2.6 PRE-REGI. GEAR2 3.2.8.6
75 PL 4.2.29 CLUTCH BRACKET 3.2.7.11/12 104 PL 5.2.7 TURN IDLER GEAR 3.2.8.6
76 PL 4.3.3 RETARD PAD ASSY 3.2.7.9 105 PL 5.2.8 PRE-REGI. CLUTCH 3.2.8.5
77 PL 4.3.4 RETARD SPRING 3.2.7.9 106 PL 5.2.10 PRE-REGI. GEAR 1 3.2.8.5
78 PL 4.3.5 OIL DAMPER GEAR 107 PL 5.2.11 PRE-REGI. GEAR ASSY 3.2.8.5
79 PL 4.3.6 MSI HARNESS ASSY 108 PL 5.2.12 PRE-REGI. GEAR 3
80 PL 4.3.7 MSI N/F FRONT SPRING 3.2.7.13 109 PL 5.2.13 PRE-REGI. GEAR 5
81 PL 4.3.8 MSI N/F REAR SPRING 3.2.7.13 110 PL 5.2.14 PRE-REGI. GEAR 6
82 PL 4.3.9 MSI BOTTOM ASSY (With 10-20) 3.2.7.13 111 PL 5.2.15 CLUTCH 3.2.8.7
83 PL 4.3.10 MSI BOTTOM PLATE 112 PL 5.2.16 REGI. METAL ROLL 3.2.8.9
84 PL 4.3.11 MSI BASE TRAY 3.2.7.14 113 PL 5.2.17 REGI. UPPER BEARING 3.2.8.7/9
85 PL 4.3.12 MSI FRONT GUIDE 114 PL 5.2.18 REGI. OUT GEAR 3.2.8.9
86 PL 4.3.13 MSI GUIDE SPRING 115 PL 5.2.19 REGI. BRAKE ASSY (With 20-22) 3.2.8.8/9/10
87 PL 4.3.14 MSI REAR GUIDE 116 PL 5.2.20 CLUTCH 3.2.8.8
117 PL 5.2.21 REGI. BRAKE GEAR 3.2.8.8
88 PL 4.3.15 GUIDE BLOCK
118 PL 5.2.23 REGI. GEAR 3.2.8.10
119 PL 5.2.24 REGI. RUBBER ROLL 3.2.8.10
Table A-5. Part List (5/9) Table A-6. Part List (6/9)
No. PL No. Part Name Reference No. PL No. Part Name Reference
120 PL 5.2.25 REGI. LOWER BEARING 3.2.8.10 150 PL 7.2.4 ROTARY REAR BEARING 3.2.10.5
121 PL 5.2.26 REGI. FRONT SPRING 3.2.8.10 151 PL 7.2.5 ROTARY LATCH ASSY 3.2.10.7/2
122 PL 5.2.27 REGI. REAR SPRING 3.2.8.10 152 PL 7.2.10 DEVE. DISCHARGE ASSY
123 PL 5.2.28 REGI. SENSOR 3.2.8.11 153 PL 7.2.11 DEVE. CONTACT ASSY
124 PL 5.2.31 FRONT OHP SENSOR 3.2.8.12 154 PL 7.2.22 ROTARY SENSOR 3.2.10.4
125 PL 5.2.32 REAR OHP SENSOR 3.2.8.13 155 PL 7.2.26 CARTRIDGE SENSOR (With 29, 30) 3.2.10.6
126 PL 5.2.33 REGI. HARNESS ASSY 156 PL 7.2.27 CART. SENSOR HARNESS 3.2.10.6
127 PL 6.1.1 ROS ASSY 3.2.9.3 157 PL 7.2.30 USED CART. SENSOR 3.2.10.7
128 PL 6.1.10 DRUM CARTRIDGE *1 3.2.9.1 158 PL 8.1.3 TRANSFER ASSY 3.2.11.2
129 PL 6.1.12 WASTE TONER BOX (With 11-13)*1 3.2.9.2 159 PL 8.1.4 TENSION LEVER 3.2.11.1
130 PL 6.1.20 ADC SENSOR ASSY 3.2.9.4 160 PL8.1.10 2ND BTR CAM ASSY 3.2.11.6
131 PL 6.1.30 ERASE LAMP ASSY 3.2.9.8 161 PL 8.1.11 2ND BTR GEAR B3
132 PL 6.1.40 XL RAIL ASSY (With 41-46) 3.2.9.5 162 PL 8.1.12 BTR BEARING-4 3.2.11.6
133 PL 6.1.42 WASTE TONER SENSOR 3.2.9.6 163 PL 8.1.13 BTR BEARING-6 3.2.11.6
134 PL 6.1.43 TONER BOX SENSOR 3.2.9.7 164 PL 8.1.15 SOLENOID 3.2.11.3
135 PL 6.1.44 TONER BOX HARNESS 165 PL 8.1.20 2ND BTR ASSY *2 3.2.11.5
136 PL 6.1.50 BCR CONNECTOR ASSY 166 PL 8.1.30 BELT CLEANER ASSY *2 3.2.11.4
137 PL 6.1.70 CRUM CONNECTOR ASSY 3.2.11.7 167 PL 8.1.31 CLEANER SUPPORT ASSY
138 PL 7.1.1 TONER CARTRIDGE Y *1 3.2.10.1 168 PL 8.1.40 AUGER HIGH ASSY 3.2.11.7
139 PL 7.1.2 TONER CARTRIDGE M *1 3.2.10.1 169 PL 8.2.2 IBT BELT ASSY 3.2.11.8
140 PL 7.1.3 TONER CARTRIDGE C *1 3.2.10.1 170 PL 8.2.12 TRO SENSOR 3.2.11.9
141 PL 7.1.4 TONER CARTRIDGE BK *1 3.2.10.1 171 PL 8.3.5 TORQUE GEAR ASSY
142 PL 7.1.10 DEVELOPER ASSY Y (With 11-13, 50) 3.2.10.2 172 PL 9.1.1 FUSER ASSY (With 2,3) 3.2.12.2
143 PL 7.1.13 DEVELOPER Y 3.2.10.3 173 PL 9.1.2 MAIN FUSER ASSY *2 3.2.12.3
144 PL 7.1.20 DEVELOPER ASSY M (With 21-23, 50) 3.2.10.2 174 PL 9.1.3 FUSER TRAY ASSY
145 PL 7.1.23 DEVELOPER M 3.2.10.3 175 PL 9.2.9 PRESSURE ROLL 3.2.12.11
146 PL 7.1.30 DEVELOPER ASSY C (With 31-33, 50) 3.2.10.2 176 PL 9.1.10 OIL ROLL ASSY *1 3.2.12.1
147 PL 7.1.33 DEVELOPER C 3.2.10.3 *1: Consumables
148 PL 7.1.40 DEVELOPER ASSY BK (With 41-43, 50) 3.2.10.2 *2: Part requires periodical replacement
149 PL 7.1.44 DEVELOPER BK 3.2.10.3
*1: Consumables
Table A-7. Part List (7/9) Table A-8. Part List (8/9)
No. PL No. Part Name Reference No. PL No. Part Name Reference
177 PL 9.2.10 BEARING 3.2.12.14/17/ 207 PL 9.4.4 SENSOR
18/20 208 PL 9.4.5 FUSER IN HARNESS
178 PL 9.2.12 HEAT ROLL 3.2.12.10 209 PL 9.4.6 FUSER IN HOLDER
179 PL 9.2.13 BEARING 3.2.12.10 210 PL 9.4.14 FUSER COLLAR
180 PL 9.2.14 H/R GEAR 3.2.12.10 211 PL 9.4.15 INPUT GEAR FT1 3.3.1
181 PL 9.2.15 H/R RING 3.2.12.10 212 PL 9.4.16 INPUT GEAR FT2
182 PL 9.2.19 P/R HEATER 3.2.12.6 213 PL 9.4.17 INPUT STUD
183 PL 9.2.20 H/R HEATER 3.2.12.5 214 PL 9.4.18 BEARING
184 PL 9.2.23 FUSER UPPER ASSY 3.2.12.4 215 PL 9.4.22 CLEANER CAM GEAR
185 PL 9.2.24 TEMP. SENSOR ASSY 3.2.12.12 216 PL 9.4.23 SOLENOID 3.2.12.17
186 PL 9.2.25 SENSOR 3.2.12.8 217 PL 9.4.24 BEARING 3.2.12.18
187 PL 9.2.26 LOWER GUIDE ASSY (With 27-31) 3.2.12.7 218 PL 9.4.25 BEARING
188 PL 9.2.32 UPPER GUIDE ASSY (With 33-37) 3.2.12.9 219 PL 9.4.26 CLEANER CAM ASSY 3.2.12.18
189 PL 9.2.33 EXIT UPPER GUIDE 3.2.12.9 220 PL 9.4.27 CLEANER CAM PIN 3.2.12.18
190 PL 9.3.3 FUSER TRAY LEVER 3.2.12.16/20 221 PL 9.4.28 CLEANER CAM 3.2.12.18
191 PL 9.3.4 FUSER TRAY CAP-B 222 PL 9.4.29 CLN CAM GUIDE
192 PL 9.3.7 EXIT-1 ROLL ASSY 3.2.12.19 223 PL 9.4.30 CLN CAM GUIDE HOLDER
193 PL 9.3.8 EXIT-1 GEAR 3.2.12.19 224 PL 10.1.1 EXIT LOWER ASSY 3.2.13.3
194 PL 9.3.9 BEARING 3.2.12.19 225 PL 10.1.2 EXIT UPPER ASSY 3.2.13.2
195 PL 9.3.10 EXCHANGE CHUTE 3.2.12.13 226 PL 10.1.10 EXIT TRAY ASSY (With 11-15) 3.2.13.1
196 PL 9.3.11 EXCHANGE SPRING 227 PL 10.2.5 EXIT-2 ROLL ASSY 3.2.13.4
197 PL 9.3.12 F/U EXIT ELIMINATOR 228 PL 10.2.6 BEARING 3.2.13.5
198 PL 9.3.16 EXCHANGE SOLENOID 3.2.12.15 229 PL 10.2.7 EXIT-3 ROLL ASSY 3.2.13.5
199 PL 9.3.17 IDLER GEAR FT1 230 PL 10.2.8 BEARING 3.2.13.5
200 PL 9.3.18 IDLER GEAR FT2 231 PL 10.2.9 SPUR GEAR 3.2.13.4/5
201 PL 9.3.19 BEARING 232 PL 10.2.10 EXIT IDLER GEAR
202 PL 9.3.21 SOLENOID 3.2.12.14 233 PL 10.2.12 TOP EXIT SENSOR 3.2.13.7
203 PL 9.3.22 OIL CAM ASSY 3.2.12.16 234 PL 10.2.13 EXIT CHUTE SWITCH 3.2.13.8
204 PL 9.3.25 CRU SWITCH ASSY 3.2.12.20 235 PL 10.2.14 EXIT HARNESS
205 PL 9.3.26 FUSER HARNESS ASSY 236 PL 10.2.15 FUSER FAN 3.2.13.6
206 PL 9.4.3 FUSER TRAY CAP-A 237 PL 11.1.1 P/H DRIVE ASSY 3.2.14.1
Figure A-29. P/J Location (2) Figure A-30. P/J Location (3)
Figure A-31. P/J Location (4) Figure A-32. P/J Location (5)
Figure A-33. P/J Location (6) Figure A-34. P/J Location (7)
Table A-11. Plug and Jack (P/J) Location Table (2/7) Table A-12. Plug and Jack (P/J) Location Table (3/7)
P/J Coordinate Notes P/J Coordinate Notes
Connects Process Motor Assembly and Main Harness 76A F-813 Connector in Fuser Harness Assembly.
52 D-607
Assembly. Connects CRU Switch Assembly and Fuser Harness
77 G-808
Connects Dispense Motor Assembly and Main Harness Assembly.
55 E-708
Assembly. 77A G-808 Connector in Fuser Harness Assembly.
Connects Developer Clutch Assembly and Main Harness 78A I-813 Connector in Fuser Harness Assembly.
56 F-708
Assembly.
78B I-813 Connector in Fuser Harness Assembly.
56A F-708 Connector in Main Harness Assembly.
79 E-812 Connects Heater Wire and Fuser Harness Assembly.
57 C-509 Connects TR0 Sensor and Main Harness Assembly.
80 D-813 Connects Fuser Chute Fan and Fuser Harness Assembly.
58 F-708 Connects Rotary Sensor and Main Harness Assembly.
80A D-813 Connector in Fuser Harness Assembly.
Connects Cleaner Cam Solenoid and Fuser Harness
62 E-812 Connects ADC Sensor Assembly and Main Harness
Assembly. 81 C-110
Assembly.
62A E-812 Connector in Fuser Harness Assembly.
81A C-110 Connector in Main Harness Assembly.
63 C-710 Connects BTR Cam Solenoid and Main Harness Assembly.
82 G-608 Connects Developer Fan and Main Harness Assembly.
63A C-710 Connector in Main Harness Assembly.
82A G-608 Connector in Main Harness Assembly.
68 B-610 Connects Main Harness Assembly and Option.
83 G-106 Connects Toner Box Sensor and Toner Box Harness.
68A B-610 Connector in Main Harness Assembly.
83A G-106 Connector in Toner Box Harness.
Connects Fuser Harness Assembly and Fuser Rear Rail
69A G-814 Connects Main Harness Assembly and CRUM Connector
Relay Connector. 84 I-107
Assembly.
69B G-814 Connects Fuser Rear Rail Relay Connector and Option.
84A I-107 Connector in Main Harness Assembly.
70 F-711 Connects Main Harness Assembly and Fuser Connector.
Connects CRUM Connector Assembly and CRUM
71 F-710 Connects Fuser Harness Assembly and Fuser Connector. 85 H-107
Assembly.
71A F-710 Connects Fuser Connector and Main Harness Assembly. Connects Erase Lamp Assembly and Main Harness
86 I-105
72A G-812 Connects Fuser Harness Assembly and Connector-5PW. Assembly.
Connects Connector-5PW and Temperature Sensor 86A I-105 Connector in Main Harness Assembly.
72B G-812
Assembly. Connects Used Cartridge Sensor and Main Harness
87 I-506
73 I-812 Connects Oil Cam Solenoid and Fuser Harness Assembly. Assembly.
73A I-812 Connector in Fuser Harness Assembly. 88 F-106 Connects Waste Toner Sensor and Toner Box Harness.
Connects Exchange Solenoid and Fuser Harness 89 D-805 Connects Cartridge Sensor Harness and Exit Harness.
74 I-813
Assembly. 89A D-805 Connector in Exit Harness.
74A I-813 Connector in Fuser Harness Assembly. 90A G-409 Connector in Registration Harness Assembly.
Connects Fuser Exit Sensor and Temperature Sensor 90B G-409 Connector in Registration Harness Assembly.
75 H-808
Assembly.
76 F-813 Connects Fuser In Harness and Fuser Harness Assembly.
Table A-13. Plug and Jack (P/J) Location Table (4/7) Table A-14. Plug and Jack (P/J) Location Table (5/7)
P/J Coordinate Notes P/J Coordinate Notes
Registration Harness Assembly and P/H Harness 106 E-211 Connects Low Paper Sensor and P/H Harness Assembly.
D-211 Assembly. 106A E-211 Connector in P/H Harness Assembly.
(P/H Harness Assembly side)
91 107 E-213 Connects Tray N/P Sensor and Tray N/P Harness.
Registration Harness Assembly and P/H Harness
Connects Registration Brake Clutch and Registration
E-408 Assembly. 109 D-409
Harness Assembly.
(Registration Harness Assembly side)
109A D-409 Connector in Registration Harness Assembly.
Connects Registration Harness Assembly and Connector-
92A E-409 110A G-408 Connector in Registration Harness Assembly.
6PW.
92B E-409 Connects MSI Harness Assembly and Connector-6PW. 110B G-408 Connector in Registration Harness Assembly.
Connects Registration Sensor and Registration Har- G-708 Connects Main Harness Assembly and Exit Connector-3P.
93 D-408 111A
ness Assembly. D-805
Connects Registration Clutch and Registration Har- 111B D-806 Connects Fuser Fan and Exit Connector-3P.
94 F-408
ness Assembly. Connects Registration Harness Assembly and Connector-
113A E-410
94A F-408 Connector in Registration Harness Assembly. 7PW.
Connects Pre-Registration Clutch and Registration 113B E-410 Connects MSI Harness Assembly and Connector-7PW.
95 G-408
Harness Assembly. 115 H-408 Connector in Registration Harness Assembly.
95A G-408 Connector in Registration Harness Assembly. 116 H-106 Connects Toner Box Harness and Main Harness Assembly.
Connects MSI Harness Assembly and P/H Harness 116A H-106 Connector in Toner Box Harness.
97 F-204
Assembly. 117 H-807 Connects Fuser In Sensor and Fuser In Harness.
Connects Front OHP Sensor and Registration Harness Connects ROS Assembly (LD Assembly) and ROS
98 D-409 121 D-507
Assembly. Harness.
Connects Rear OHP Sensor and Registration Harness Connects ROS Assembly (LD Assembly) and Video
99 E-408 122 D-506
Assembly. Harness.
101 D-212 Connects Tray N/P Harness and P/H Harness Assembly. Connects ROS Assembly (Scanner Assembly) and ROS
123 E-506
101A D-212 Connector in P/H Harness Assembly. Harness.
Connects Size Switch Assembly and Main Harness 124 C-506 Connects ROS Assembly (SOS PWB) and ROS Harness.
102 D-711
Assembly. 131 B-610 Connects Main Harness Assembly and Option.
Connects Main Harness Assembly and Feeder Connector- 131A B-610 Connector in Main Harness Assembly.
103A F-206
2P.
132 B-610 Connects Main Harness Assembly and Option.
103B F-206 Connects Feed Solenoid and Feeder Connector-2P.
132A B-610 Connector in Main Harness Assembly.
104 D-212 Empty Connector in P/H Harness Assembly.
G-707 Connects Main Harness Assembly and Exit Connector-8P.
104A D-212 Connector in P/H Harness Assembly. 161A
D-805
105 D-205 Connects Environment Sensor and P/H Harness Assembly.
161B D-805 Connects Exit Harness and Exit Connector-8P.
105A D-205 Connector in P/H Harness Assembly.
Table A-15. Plug and Jack (P/J) Location Table (6/7) Table A-16. Plug and Jack (P/J) Location Table (7/7)
P/J Coordinate Notes P/J Coordinate Notes
163A G-707 Connects Main Harness Assembly and Exit Connector-4P. 245 F-608 Connects Rotary Motor PWB and Main Harness Assembly.
D-805 246 F-607 Connects Rotary Motor PWB and Main Harness Assembly .
163B D-805 Connects Full Stack Harness and Exit Connector-4P. 247 E-607 Connects Rotary Motor PWB and Rotary Motor Assembly.
165 G-804 Connects Top Exit Sensor and Exit Harness. F421 D-508 Connects BCR Wire and BCR Connector Assembly.
166 E-805 Connects Exit Chute Switch and Exit Harness. F422 B-108 Connects Developer Wire and Developer Contact
167 G-305 Connects Full Stack Sensor and Full Stack Harness. Assembly.
168 J-802 Connects Cartridge Sensor and Cartridge Sensor Harness. F423 D-511 Connects DTS Wire and DTS Plate.
191 E-109 Connects Front Cover Switch R and Main Harness F791 F-808 Connects H/R Heater and P/R Heater.
Assembly. A B-606 Connects HVPS and BCR Wire.
192 E-109 Connects Front Cover Switch R and Main Harness C C-607 Connects HVPS and Developer Wire.
Assembly. D B-609 Connects HVPS and 1st BTR Wire.
193 E-109 Connects Front Cover Switch R and Main Harness F B-608 Connects HVPS and Contact Roll Wire.
Assembly.
G B-608 Connects HVPS and DTS Wire.
194 E-109 Connects Front Cover SwitcH R and Main Harness
T1 F-811 Connects Heater Wire and Fuser Upper Assembly.
Assembly.
T2 I-807 Connects P/R Heater and Heater Wire.
195 H-607 Connects Top Cover Switch and Main Harness Assembly.
T3 D-510 Connects 1st BTR Wire and 1st BTR Bias Plate.
195A H-607 Connector in Main Harness Assembly.
T4 E-510 Connects Contact Roll Wire and Contact Plate.
196 F-203 Connects ROS Harness and Main Harness Assembly.
T5 I-806 Connects H/R Heater and Fuser Upper Assembly.
197 H-506 Connects Front Cover Switch L and Main Harness
Assembly. 310 F-306 Connects Panel Harness and Controller PWB.
197A H-506 Connector in Main Harness Assembly. 314 G-306 Connects Controller Fan and Controller PWB.
201A I-408 Connects MSI Harness Assembly and Connector-2PB. 317 C-306 Connects Operation Panel and Panel Harness.
201B I-408 Connects Pick Up Solenoid and Connector-2PB.
202A H-408 Connects MSI Harness Assembly and Connector-2PW.
202B H-408 Connects MSI Clutch and Connector-2PW.
203 G-409 Connects MSI Short N/P Sensor and MSI Harness
Assembly.
204 G-408 Connects MSI Edge Sensor and MSI Harness Assembly.
205 H-409 Connects MSI OHP Sensor and MSI Harness Assembly.
206 G-409 Connects MSI Long N/P Sensor and MSI Harness
Assembly.
207 F-409 Connector in MSI Harness Assembly.
A.3 Wiring Diagrams and Signa lnformation NOTE: On the following pages, the Developer Assembly Y, Developer
Assembly M, Developer Assembly C, Developer Assembly Bk are
called the Developer Assembly.
A.3.1 Master Wiring Diagram
The following table gives the notations used in th wiring diagrams on the
next page.
A.3.2.1 Organization
§ 3. MCU PWB, HVPS, LVPS, BCR Connector Assembly, Developer Contact
Assembly, Transfer Assembly, 2nd BTR Cam Assembly, Drum Cartridge,
The wiring diagram is divided into the following 13 sections. The signal 2nd BTR Assembly
names, pin numbers and other information are given in detailed Connection between: • MCU PWB and HVPS
diagrams by sections. • LVPS and HVPS
§1 . MCU PWB, LVPS, ROS Assembly, Fuser Assembly, Main P/H Assembly, Front • HVPS and BCR Connector Assembly
Cover Switch R, Front Cover Switch L, Top Cover Switch • HVPS and Developer Contact Assembly
Connection between: • MCU PWB and LVPSMCU • HVPS and Transfer Assembly
• PWB and ROS Assembly • HVPS and 2nd BTR Cam Assembly
• MCU PWB and Front Cover Switch L • BCR Connector Assembly and Drum Cartridge
• LVPS and Fuser Assembly • Transfer Assembly and 2nd BTR Assembly
• LVPS and Main P/H Assembly
• LVPS and Front Cover Switch R § 4. MCU PWB, Used Cartridge Sensor, Cartridge Sensor, Rotary Sensor
• LVPS and Top Cover Switch
Connection between: • Developer Clutch, Developer Fan, Dispense
• LVPS and ROS Assembly Motor Assembly
• MCU PWB and Used Cartridge Sensor
• MCU PWB and Cartridge Sensor
§2 . MCU PWB, ADC Sensor Assembly, Erase Lamp Assembly, Waste Toner
Sensor, Toner Box Sensor, Communication Assembly, CRUM Assembly • MCU PWB and Rotary Sensor
• MCU PWB and Developer Clutch
Connection between: • MCU PWB and ADC Sensor Assembly
• MCU PWB and Developer Fan
• MCU PWB and Erase Lamp Assembly
• MCU PWB and Dispense Motor Assembly
• MCU PWB and Waste Toner Sensor
• MCU PWB and Toner Box Sensor
• MCU PWB and CRUM Connector Assembly § 5. MCU PWB, LVPS, Rotary Motor PWB, Rotary Motor Assembly
• MCU PWB and CRUM Assembly Connection between: • MCU PWB and Rotary Motor PWB
• LVPS and Rotary Motor PWB
• Rotary Motor PWB and Rotary Motor Assembly
§6 . MCU PWB, LVPS, BTR Cam Solenoid, TR0 Sensor, P/H Motor § 12. MCU PWB, Top Exit Sensor, Exit Chute Switch, Full Stack Sensor,
Assembly, Process Motor Assembly Fuser Fan
Connection between: • MCU PWB and BTR Cam Solenoid Connection between: • MCU PWB and Top Exit Sensor
• MCU PWB and TR0 Sensor • MCU PWB and Exit Chute Switch
• MCU PWB and P/H Motor Assembly • MCU PWB and Full Stack Sensor
• MCU PWB and Process Motor Assembly • MCU PWB and Fuser Fan
• LVPS and P/H Motor Assembly
• LVPS and Process Motor Assembly
§ 13. MCU PWB, Controller PWB, Operation Panel, Controller Fan
Connection between: • MCU PWB and Controller PWB
§7 . MCU PWB, LVPS, Main Fuser Assembly, CRU Switch Assembly, Oil Roll • Controller PWB and Operation Panel
Assembly
• Controller PWB and Controller Fan
Connection between: • LVPS and Main Fuser Assembly
• MCU PWB and Main Fuser Assembly
• MCU PWB and CRU Switch Assembly
• CRU Switch Assembly and Oil Roll Assembly
§9 . MCU PWB, Size Switch Assembly, Feed Solenoid, Tray N/P Sensor,
Low Paper Sensor
Connection between: • MCU PWB and Size Switch Assembly
• MCU PWB and Feed Solenoid
• MCU PWB and Tray N/P Sensor
• MCU PWB and Low Paper Sensor
24VDC-I/L
ON/OFF.
Relay control signal to detect the interlock switches
LVPS overvoltage protection circuit
If the power voltage (24VDC/5VDC) becomes overvoltage, all power
and interlock connectors. Relay control signal in the
LVPS. is turned off. The operating point is 7VDC or less for 5VDC and
5VDC-LD Power source voltage for the LD Assembly in the ROS 27~36VDC (reference) for 24VDC. The system recovers by turning
Assembly. off the power and by turning on again after 2 or 3 minutes later.
SOS Scan start reference signal based on the light input to
the SOS Sensor in the SOS PWB. Power off by Front Cover Switch R
VREF Reference voltage for the target light quantity. When the Front Cover Switch R is turned off, the 24VDC-I/L circuit
LD ENB Control signal that enables the LD to turn on or forces is shut off, and the power supply to the MCU PWB (24VDC) and the
it to turn off. (High: OFF/Low: ON) ROS Assembly (LD Assembly) (5VDC-LD) is turned off. If the Front
SCANNER MOTOR ON (L) Control signal to turn the Scanner Motor in the ROS Cover Switch R is turned on, the 24VDC-I/L is input to the LVPS
5V Assembly ON/OFF. Relay circuit and the 24VDC and 5VDC-LD are output from the
PCONT Mode control signal to control the LD light quantity LVPS. The Front Cover Switch R is also an interlock switch for the
(APC). (Low: Sample mode/High: Hold mode)
5VDC-LD circuit.
VDATA Pixel data signal to turn the LD ON/OFF. (High: ON/
Low: OFF)
FRONT COVER SWITCH Signal to detect the Front Cover open (OFF)/close
ON (L) 5VDC (ON) from the Front Cover Switch L. W A R N IN G The Front Cover Switch R and Top Cover Switch are
interlock switches that prevent exposure to the laser
beam. Never tamper with these switches. Direct eye
exposure to the laser beam may cause eye injury or
blindness. For any operation involving these switches,
follow the instructions in this manual.
/B * * * *
B * * * *
A * * * *
/A * * * *
Fuser Fan
Number of polarities: 4
Number of rotations: 3400 ±200rpm (Fast) / 1900 ±250rpm
(Slow)
A.6 Large Capacity Paper Unit Feeding speed: B/W = 16 ppm (A4, LEF, 2UP*)
Color= 4 ppm (A4, LEF, 2UP*)
This section provides information on the optional Large Capacity Paper NOTE:2UP mode enables the printer to run 2 pages at a time. It
Unit. is available with the A4/LETTER sizes or smaller.
The Large Capacity Paper Unit is installed beneath the printer. It Paper Handling: Same as for the standard
consists of the 3 paper cassettes (250 sheets x 3) and also universal cassette.
accommodates the standard universal cassette. (Standard A3W
cassette can not be used.) The printer and the Large Capacity Paper
Power source: DC24V and DC5V supplied from the printer
Maximum =DC24V / 0.6A, DC5V / 0.3A
Unit are electrically connected with connectors, and when the printer is
turned on, the printer detects the Large Capacity Paper Unit and also Dimensions: 560 mm (W) x 556 mm (D) x 426 mm (H)
the paper sizes and paper presence/absence condition in the cassettes. (Unpacked)
Power is supplied to the Large Capacity Paper Unit via the printer. Weight (Unpacked):
Product name: Large Capacity Paper Unit Noise: Same as for the printer.
Installation: Beneath the printer The specifications for the standard universal paper cassette for the
Table A-36. Paper Feed Reliability NOTE: In the following step, be sure to carry the printer by 4 people or
Recommended paper General paper more.
Paper jam rate 1/3000 or less 1/2000 or less
Multiple feeding rate 1/800 or less 1/500 or less
3. Lift up the printer, keeping it level, and lower it carefully so the pegs
on the top of the La rge C ap acity P a per U nit fit in th e so ckets in th e
Life: 135 kpv (45 kpv / cassette) *2 prin ter bo ttom .
Print position accuracy: Same as for the printer. 4. Draw out the top cassette and lift it up to remove.
Paper skew: Same as for the printer. 5. Turn the 2 screws above the area where the cassettes was to install
*1: Converted to 80,000 images when the job ratio between the the L arge C ap acity P a per U nit to th e printer. T h en p ut th e ca ssette b ack
monochrome and color modes is asummed 1:1, since one page is to the p osition .
composed of 4 images (YMCK) in the color mode.
6. Open the covers at the upper left of the L arge C a pacity P a per U nit
*2: 135 kpv = 180 kpv x 75% back a nd low er le ft of the printe r back. T hen con nect 2 cables to th e
(180 kpv: printer life, 75%: estimated usage rate of the Large co nnectors at the b ack of the p rinte r, and clo se the covers.
Capacity Paper Unit.)
A.6.3 Part List (Large Capacity Paper Unit) Table A-38. Part List (Large Capacity Paper Unit) (2/2)
No. PL No. Part Name
Table A-37. Part List (Large Capacity Paper Unit) (1/2) 31 PL22.1.31 FRONT COVER BRACKET
No. PL No. Part Name 32 PL22.1.32 SHEET CLAMP
1 PL20.1.1 FEEDER UNIT (with 2, 3) 33 PL22.1.33 3TRAY FEEDER CLAMP
2 PL20.1.2 4TRAY FEEDER ASSEMBLY 34 PL22.1.34 FEEDER EME SPRING
3 PL20.1.3 UNIVERSAL TRAY 35 PL22.2.1 FEEDER HIGH ASSEMBLY (with 10-34, 40)
4 PL21.1.1 FEEDER FRONT COVER 36 PL22.2.10 FEEDER DRIVE ASSEMBLY (with 10-34)
5 PL21.1.2 FEEDER REAR COVER 37 PL22.2.11 FEEDER BRACKET
6 PL21.1.3 FEEDER HARNESS COVER 38 PL22.2.12 3TRAY IDLER GEAR-1
7 PL21.1.4 COVER BRACKET 39 PL22.2.13 FEED ROLL ASSEMBLY-3T (with 14-17)
8 PL21.1.5 FEEDER HARNESS CLAMP 40 PL22.2.14 FEED SHAFT-3T
9 PL21.1.10 FEEDER LEFT COVER 41 PL22.2.15 FEED ROLL-3T
10 PL21.1.20 FEEDER RIGHT COVER 42 PL22.2.16 FEED CORE ROLL-3T
11 PL21.1.30 FEEDER CHUTE ASSEMBLY 43 PL22.2.17 FEED ROLL GUIDE-3T
12 PL21.1.31 FEEDER CHUTE SUPPORT 44 PL22.2.18 FEED BEARING-3T
13 PL21.1.40 DOUBLE CASTER 45 PL22.2.19 FEED GEAR-3T
14 PL22.1.1 FEEDER HIGH ASSEMBLY 46 PL22.2.20 FEED SPRING-3T
15 PL22.1.2 TRAY STOPPER-3T 47 PL22.2.21 FEED SOLENOID-3T
16 PL22.1.3 TURN IN CHUTE-3T 48 PL22.2.22 3TRAY IDLER GEAR-2
17 PL22.1.4 FEEDER TOP CHUTE 49 PL22.2.23 3TRAY IDLER GEAR-3
18 PL22.1.5 FEEDER MOTOR ASSEMBLY (with 6, 7) 50 PL22.2.24 TURN ROLL ASSEMBLY-3T
19 PL22.1.6 FEEDER MOTOR 51 PL22.2.25 TURN BEARING-3T
20 PL22.1.7 FEEDER GEAR ASSEMBLY 52 PL22.2.26 TURN CLUTCH-3T
21 PL22.1.8 FEEDER PWB 53 PL22.2.27 TURN CHUTE-3T
22 PL22.1.9 FEEDER HARNESS 54 PL22.2.28 FEED SHAFT GUIDE-3T
23 PL22.1.10 MOTOR HARNESS 55 PL22.2.29 TRAY SENSOR ASSEMBLY-3T (with 30-32)
24 PL22.1.11 SIZE HARNESS 56 PL22.2.30 TRAY N/P BRACKET-3T
25 PL22.1.12 SWITCH HARNESS 57 PL22.2.31 TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR
26 PL22.1.13 SIZE BRACKET ASSEMBLY-3T (with 14, 15) 58 PL22.2.32 TRAY N/P ACTUATOR
27 PL22.1.14 SIZE BRACKET-3T 59 PL22.2.33 TRAY HARNESS-3T
28 PL22.1.15 SIZE SWITCH ASSEMBLY 60 PL22.2.34 FEEDER DRIVE CLAMP
29 PL22.1.16 FEEDER CHUTE SWITCH 61 PL22.2.4 LOW PAPER SENSOR (Factory setting option)
30 PL22.1.30 3TRAY FEEDER FRAME